SEMESTER 3

ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING

 SEMESTER S3

MATHEMATICS FOR ELECTRICAL SCIENCE AND PHYSICAL

SCIENCE – 3

(Common to B & C Groups)

Course Code GYMAT301 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Basic knowledge in
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
complex numbers.

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the concept and applications of Fourier transforms in various engineering fields.
2. To introduce the basic theory of functions of a complex variable, including residue integration
and conformal transformation, and their applications

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Fourier Integral, From Fourier series to Fourier Integral, Fourier Cosine and
Sine integrals, Fourier Cosine and Sine Transform, Linearity, Transforms of

1 Derivatives, Fourier Transform and its inverse, Linearity, Transforms of 9

Derivative.
(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 11.7, 11.8, 11.9)
Complex Function, Limit, Continuity, Derivative, Analytic functions,
Cauchy-Riemann Equations (without proof), Laplace’s Equations, Harmonic
functions, Finding harmonic conjugate, Conformal mapping, Mappings of
2 9
w= 𝑧 , 𝑤=𝑒 ,w= , 𝑤=𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑧.

(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 13.3, 13.4, 17.1, 17.2, 17.4)
Complex Integration: Line integrals in the complex plane (Definition &
Basic properties), First evaluation method, Second evaluation method,
3 9
Cauchy’s integral theorem (without proof) on simply connected domain,
Independence of path, Cauchy integral theorem on multiply connected
 domain (without proof), Cauchy Integral formula (without proof).
(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 14.1, 14.2, 14.3)

Taylor series and Maclaurin series, Laurent series (without proof),

Singularities and Zeros – Isolated Singularity, Poles, Essential Singularities,
Removable singularities, Zeros of Analytic functions – Poles and Zeros,
4 9
Formulas for Residues, Residue theorem (without proof), Residue
Integration- Integral of Rational Functions of cosθ and sinθ.
(Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 15.4, 16.1, 16.2, 16.3, 16.4)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks , ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Determine the Fourier transforms of functions and apply them to solve
CO1 K3
problems arising in engineering.
Understand the analyticity of complex functions and apply it in
CO2 K3
conformal mapping.
Compute complex integrals using Cauchy's integral theorem and
CO3 K3
Cauchy's integral formula.
Understand the series expansion of complex function about a
CO4 K3
singularity and apply residue theorem to compute real integrals.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 - 2 - - - - - - - 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
th
Advanced Engineering 10 edition,
1 Erwin Kreyszig John Wiley & Sons
Mathematics 2016
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Dennis G. Zill, Patrick D. 3rd edition,
1 Complex Analysis Jones & Bartlett
Shanahan 2015
Higher Engineering McGraw-Hill 39th edition,
2 B. V. Ramana
Mathematics Education 2023
44th
Higher Engineering
3 B.S. Grewal Khanna Publishers edition,
Mathematics
2018
Fast Fourier Transform - K.R. Rao, Do Nyeon 1st edition,
4 Springer
Algorithms and Applications Kim, Jae Jeong Hwang 2011
 SEMESTER S3

CIRCUITS & NETWORKS

Course Code PCEET302 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) Introduction to Course Type Theory

Electrical Engineering

Course Objectives:

1. This course analyses electrical circuits in steady-state and dynamic conditions with DC
and sinusoidal excitations
2. It also describes the two-port networks in terms of various parameters.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Mesh analysis and nodal analysis ( Review only)- super mesh and super
node - Superposition principle - source transformation – analysis with DC
and AC (sinusoidal) excitation

1 Thevenin’s theorem - Norton’s theorem - Maximum power transfer

theorem - analysis with DC and AC (sinusoidal) excitation with 12
independent and dependent sources.
Reciprocity Theorem - application to the analysis of DC Circuits.
Resonance - series resonance– resonant frequency – variations of
impedance and current with frequency – bandwidth – quality factor–
parallel resonance (series RL in parallel with C –calculation of resonant
frequency).
2
Power in 3-phase circuits – complex power - active, reactive and apparent
12
power in balanced load – steadystate analysis of 3-wire unbalanced delta
connected circuit - steady state analysis of 3-phase 4-wire and 3-wire (using
Millman’s theorem only) unbalanced star connected circuit –neutral shift
Laplace transforms( Review only)
3 12
Transient response of simple series and parallel RL and RC circuits with
 DC excitation and initial conditions – natural response and forced response
– time constant - solution using Laplace transforms – transformed circuits
in s-domain – solution using mesh analysis and nodal analysis
Transient response of series RLC circuit with DC excitation and initial
conditions – damping –overdamped, underdamped, critically damped and
undamped - solution using Laplace transforms
Transient response of simple series and parallel RL and RC circuits with
sinusoidal excitation and zero initial conditions – solution using Laplace
transforms
Two port networks – Z, Y, h, T parameters – conditions for symmetry and
reciprocity – relationship between parameters – interconnection of two port
networks – series, parallel and cascade
4
Coupled circuit – dot convention – fixing of dots – coefficient of coupling - 9
conductively coupled equivalent circuit - sinusoidal steady state analysis of
coupled circuits.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Apply circuit theorems to solve complex DC and AC electric K3
CO1
networks
Apply transformation from time domain to s-domain, solve K3
CO2
dynamic electric circuits.
CO3 Solve series and parallel resonant circuits K3
Analyse three-phase networks in star and delta configurations K3
CO4
under balanced and unbalanced conditions.
CO5 Describe two-port networks in terms of various parameters. K3
Explain the steady-state behaviour of coupled circuits with K3
CO6
sinusoidal excitation
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3

CO5 3 3 3

CO6 3 3 3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Network Analysis Van Valkenburg Pearson 3rd 2019
Network Analysis and Ravish R Singh McGraw Hill
2 2nd 2019
Synthesis Education
3 Electric Circuits & Networks Suresh Kumar Pearson Ist 2008
Circuits and Networks, A Sudhakar, McGraw Hill
4 5th 2017
Analysis and Synthesis Shyammohan S Palli Education
 SEMESTER S3

DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS

Course Code PCEOT303 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

UCEST105,
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
GBEST204

Course Objectives:

1. To impart a thorough understanding of linear data structures such as arrays, stacks,

queues and linked lists and their applications.
2. To impart a thorough understanding of non-linear data structures such as trees, graphs and
their applications.
3. To impart familiarity with various sorting, searching and hashing techniques and their
performance comparison.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Basic Concepts of Data Structures: Algorithms, Performance Analysis,
Space Complexity, Time Complexity, Asymptotic Notations
1
Arrays: Linear Search and Binary Search, Stacks, Queues-Circular Queues,
11
Priority Queues, Double Ended Queues, Evaluation of Expressions
Linked List: Self-Referential Structures, Dynamic Memory Allocation,
Singly Linked List- Operations on Linked List. Doubly Linked List, Circular
2
Linked List, Stacks and Queues using Linked List, Polynomial
11
representation using Linked List
Trees and Graphs: Trees, Binary Trees-Tree Operations, Binary Tree
Representation, Tree Traversals, Binary Search
3 11
Trees- Binary Search Tree Operations
Graphs, Representation of Graphs, Depth First Search and Breadth First
 Search on Graphs, Applications of Graphs

Sorting and Hashing: Sorting Techniques – Selection Sort, Insertion Sort,

Quick Sort, Merge Sort and Heap Sort
4
Hashing- Hashing Techniques, Collision Resolution, Overflow handling, 11
Hashing functions – Mid square, Division, Folding, Digit Analysis

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Compare performance of algorithms using asymptotic notations K2

Solve real world problems efficiently using appropriate data K3

CO2
structures like arrays, linked list, stacks and queues.
Make use of nonlinear data structures like trees and graphs to K3
CO3
design algorithms for various applications.

CO4 Apply and compare various techniques for searching and sorting. K3

Apply appropriate hash function to store and access a given K3

CO5
dataset
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - -

CO2 3 2 3 1 - 1 - - - - - -

CO3 3 2 3 1 - 1 - - - - - -

CO4 2 2 3 1 - 1 - - - - - -

CO5 3 2 2 1 - 1 - - - - - -
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Ellis
1 Fundamentals of Data Horowitz,SartajSahni
Universities Press
Structures in C and Susan Anderson-
Freed
2 Classic Data Structures Samanta D Prentice Hall India 2/e, 2009
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Data Structures: A Pseudocode Richard F. Gilberg,
1 Cengage Learning 2/e, 2005
Approach with C Behrouz A. Forouzan
Aho A. V., J. E. Hopcroft
2 Data Structures and Algorithms Pearson Publication 1983
and J. D. Ullman
Introduction to Data Structures Tremblay J. P. and P. G.
3 Tata McGraw Hill 1995
with Applications Sorenson
Cambridge University
4 Advanced Data Structures Peter Brass 2008
Press
Theory and Problems of Data
5 Lipschuts S. Schaum’s Series 1986
Structures

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102064
https://youtu.be/zWg7U0OEAoE
1
https://youtu.be/g1USSZVWDsY
https://youtu.be/PGWZUgzDMYI
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102064
2
https://youtu.be/PGWZUgzDMYI
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102064
https://youtu.be/tORLeHHtazM
3
https://youtu.be/eWeqqVpgNPg
https://youtu.be/9zpSs845wf8
https://youtu.be/KW0UvOW0XIo
4
https://youtu.be/gtWw_8VvHjk
 SEMESTER S3

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND LOGIC SYSTEM DESIGN

Course Code PBEOT304 CIE Marks 60

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PCEOT205 Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Explain the various number systems, Digital logic gates and Boolean expressions
2. Design and implement different types of combinational and sequential logic circuits
3. Design and implement digital circuits using Hardware Descriptive Language.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Number Systems and Codes – binary, octal and hexadecimal –
conversions – ASCII code, Excess –3 code, Gray code, BCD code
Signed numbers – 1’s complement and 2’s complement – addition and
subtraction
Basic logic gates – universal gates – TTL – CMOS – Internal diagram of
1 TTL NAND gate and CMOS NOR gate – comparison of CMOS and TTL
9
performance.
Boolean laws and theorems – Sum of products and Product of sums forms
– K map representation and simplification (up to four variables) – pairs,
quads, octets – don’t careconditions.
Combinational circuits– half adder and full adder, halfsubtractor and
fullsubtractor –4-bit parallel binary adder/subtractor.
Comparators – parity generators and checkers – encoders – decoders –
2 BCD to seven segment decoder.
9
Multiplexers– implementation of boolean expressions using multiplexers–
demultiplexers.
 Flip-Flops– SR, JK, D and T flip-flops – characteristic table and
excitation table– JK Master Slave Flip-flop – Conversion of flip-flops –
SR to JK and JK to SR only.
Up/Down counters – asynchronous counters – mod-6 and mod-10
3 10
counters.
Synchronous counters – design of synchronous counters – Ring counter
– Johnson Counter.
Shift registers - SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO.
State Machines – state transition diagram – Moore and Mealy machines.
Digital to Analog converter –weighted resistor type, R-2R Laddertype.
Analog to Digital Converter – flash type, successive approximation
4
type. 8
Introduction to Verilog– Implementation of AND, OR, half adder and full
adder.

Suggestion on Project Topics

Project based learning

Project-based learning (PBL) in digital electronics combines hands-on learning with theoretical
knowledge, providing a comprehensive understanding of digital systems and components.

Project-Based Learning Structure:

1. Selection of Topic

•Objective: Choose a relevant digital electronics project that incorporates both combinational and
sequential logic circuits.

•Guidance: Topics should be selected based on their applicability, innovation, and the depth of
knowledge they offer in digital electronics.

2. Design and Optimization of Digital Circuit

•Tools: Utilize design software to draft and optimize circuit layouts.

•Verilog HDL: Focus on coding the logic in Verilog, ensuring that the design is efficient and scalable.

3. Simulation and Hardware Implementation

•Discrete Components: Integrate additional discrete components as necessary to complete the project
setup.
•FPGA: Implement the design on FPGA boards, translating the Verilog HDL code into a physical,
functioning circuit.

This structured approach not only enhances the learning experience but also prepares students for
professional challenges in the field of digital electronics.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
module. which 1 question should be answered. Each question
 Total of 8 Questions, can have a maximum of 2 sub divisions. Each question 40
each carrying 2 marks carries 6 marks.
(8x2 =16 marks) (4x6 = 24 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Identify various number systems, binary codes and formulate K2
CO1
digital functions using Boolean algebra.
CO2 Design combinational logic circuits. K3
CO3 Design sequential logic circuits. K3
Describe the operation of various analog to digital and digital to K2
CO4
analog conversion circuits.
CO5 Explain the basic concepts of programming using Verilog HDL K2
Design and realize medium complexity practical digital K6
CO6
hardware circuits.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO6 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 3

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Digital Fundamentals Floyd T.L Pearson Education
1 11/e, 2017
Digital Principles and Albert Paul Malvino& Mc-GRAW Hill
2 Applications Donald P. Leach International Editions 4/e, 2018

Digital Design: With an M. Morris Mano, Pearson Education

Introduction to the Verilog Michael D. Ciletti
3 6/e, 2018
HDL, VHDL, and System
Verilog
Digital Integrated Electronics Herbert Taub McGraw Hill 2017
4
and Donald Schilling Education
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Fundamentals of Digital Logic McGraw Hill
1 Stephen Brown 2nd Edition
with Verilog Design Education
Fundamental of Digital A Anand Kumar Prentice Hall
2 4/e, 2023
Circuits
Digital Circuits and Design S. Salivahanan Oxford University
3 2018
Press
Digital Design Verilog HDL 1st Edition,
4 Joseph Cavanagh CRC Press
and Fundamentals 2008

5 Digital Circuits and Systems D.V. Hall Tata McGraw Hill 1989

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No. Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105132/
1
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/18/106/108106177/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105132/
2
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106177/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105132/
3
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106177/
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105132/
4
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/106/108106177/
PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/
Presentation
Laboratory
Lecture delivery Project identification (Progress and Final
Work/
Presentations)
Workshops
Group
Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
discussion
Question Project Milestone Reviews,
answer Analytical thinking
Feedback,
Sessions/ and Testing
Project reformation (If
Brainstorming self-learning
required)
Sessions
Poster Presentation/
Guest Speakers
Case Study/ Field Video Presentation: Students
(Industry Prototyping
Survey Report present their results in a 2 to 5
Experts)
minutes video
 Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Sl. No Evaluation for Allotted

Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer 4
Sessions
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3
4 Execution and Implementation 10
5 Final Presentations 5
6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3
Total 30

1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

 Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

 Research and background understanding
 Defined objectives and methodology

2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

 Individual contribution to the presentation

 Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

 Active participation and individual contribution

 Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

 Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

 Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
 Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

 Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

 Individual contribution to the presentation
 Effectiveness in answering questions
6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

 Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

 Innovation and originality in the project
 Creativity in solutions and approaches
 SEMESTER S3

INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND DATA

SCIENCE

Course Code GNEST305 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Demonstrate a solid understanding of advanced linear algebra concepts, machine

learning algorithms and statistical analysis techniques relevant to engineering
applications, principles and algorithms.
2. Apply theoretical concepts to solve practical engineering problems, analyze data to
extract meaningful insights, and implement appropriate mathematical and computational
techniques for AI and data science applications.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to AI and Machine Learning: Basics of Machine Learning -
types of Machine Learning systems-challenges in ML- Supervised learning
model example- regression models- Classification model example- Logistic

1 regression-unsupervised model example- K-means clustering. Artificial

Neural Network- Perceptron- Universal Approximation Theorem (statement 11
only)- Multi-Layer Perceptron- Deep Neural Network- demonstration of
regression and classification problems using MLP.(Text-2)
Mathematical Foundations of AI and Data science: Role of linear algebra
in Data representation and analysis – Matrix decomposition- Singular Value
2
Decomposition (SVD)- Spectral decomposition- Dimensionality reduction
11
technique-Principal Component Analysis (PCA). (Text-1)

3 Applied Probability and Statistics for AI and Data Science: Basics of 11

 probability-random variables and statistical measures - rules in probability-
Bayes theorem and its applications- statistical estimation-Maximum
Likelihood Estimator (MLE) - statistical summaries- Correlation analysis-
linear correlation (direct problems only)- regression analysis- linear
regression (using least square method) (Text book 4 )
Basics of Data Science: Benefits of data science-use of statistics and
Machine Learning in Data Science- data science process - applications of
Machine Learning in Data Science- modelling process- demonstration of

4 ML applications in data science- Big Data and Data Science. (For

11
visualization the software tools like Tableau, PowerBI, R or Python can be
used. For Machine Learning implementation, Python, MATLAB or R can
be used.)(Text book-5)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks , ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Apply the concept of machine learning algorithms including neural K3

CO1 networks and supervised/unsupervised learning techniques for

engineering applications.
Apply advanced mathematical concepts such as matrix operations, K3

CO2 singular values, and principal component analysis to analyze and solve
engineering problems.
Analyze and interpret data using statistical methods including K3

CO3 descriptive statistics, correlation, and regression analysis to derive

meaningful insights and make informed decisions.
Integrate statistical approaches and machine learning techniques to K3
CO4
ensure practically feasible solutions in engineering contexts.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 3
 Text Books
Name of the Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher and Year
Wellesley-Cambridge 6th edition,
1 Introduction to Linear Algebra Gilbert Strang
Press 2023
Hands-on machine learning with 2nd
2 Scikit-Learn, Keras, and Aurélien Géron O'Reilly Media, Inc. edition,202
TensorFlow 2
Deisenroth, Marc
Cambridge University 1st edition.
3 Mathematics for machine learning Peter, A. Aldo Faisal,
Press 2020
and Cheng Soon Ong
Fundamentals of mathematical Gupta, S. C., and V. 9th edition,
4 Sultan Chand & Sons
statistics K. Kapoor 2020
Introducing data science: big data,
Cielen, Davy, and Arno 1st edition,
5 machine learning, and more, using Simon and Schuster
Meysman 2016
Python tools

Reference Books

Sl. Edition and

Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
No Year

Data science: concepts and Kotu, Vijay, and Bala 2nd edition,
1 Morgan Kaufmann
practice Deshpande 2018
Probability and Statistics for Carlos Fernandez- Center for Data Science 1st edition,
2
Data Science Granda in NYU 2017
Avrim Blum, John
3 Cambridge University 1st edition,
Foundations of Data Science Hopcroft, and Ravi
Press 2020
Kannan
1st edition,
4 Statistics For Data Science James D. Miller Packt Publishing
2019
Probability and Statistics - Michael J. Evans and 1st edition,
5 University of Toronto
The Science of Uncertainty Jeffrey S. Rosenthal 2009
chrome-
6 An Introduction to the
extension://efaidnbmnnn Preliminary
Science of Statistics: From Joseph C. Watkins
ibpcajpcglclefindmkaj/ht Edition.
Theory to Implementation
tps://www.math.arizo
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module No. Link ID
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106198/
1
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106198/

2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/18-06-linear-algebra-spring-2010/resources/lecture-29-singular-
value-decomposition/
https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/18-650-statistics-for-applications-fall-2016/resources/lecture-19-
3
video/

4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106198/
 SEMESTER S3/S4

ECONOMICS FOR ENGINEERS

(Common to All Branches)

Course Code UCHUT346 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
2:0:0:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Understanding of finance and costing for engineering operation, budgetary planning and
control
2. Provide fundamental concept of micro and macroeconomics related to engineering
industry
3. Deliver the basic concepts of Value Engineering.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Basic Economics Concepts - Basic economic problems – Production
Possibility Curve – Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility – Law of
Demand - Law of supply – Elasticity - measurement of elasticity and its
1 6
applications – Equilibrium- Changes in demand and supply and its effects

Production function - Law of variable proportion – Economies of Scale –

Internal and External Economies – Cobb-Douglas Production Function

Cost concepts – Social cost, private cost – Explicit and implicit cost – Sunk
cost - Opportunity cost - short run cost curves - Revenue concepts

2 Firms and their objectives – Types of firms – Markets - Perfect Competition 6

– Monopoly - Monopolistic Competition - Oligopoly (features and
equilibrium of a firm)

Monetary System – Money – Functions - Central Banking –Inflation -

3 6
Causes and Effects – Measures to Control Inflation - Monetary and Fiscal
 policies – Deflation

Taxation – Direct and Indirect taxes (merits and demerits) - GST

National income – Concepts - Circular Flow – Methods of Estimation and

Difficulties - Stock Market – Functions- Problems faced by the Indian stock
market-Demat Account and Trading Account – Stock market Indicators-
SENSEX and NIFTY
Value Analysis and value Engineering - Cost Value, Exchange Value, Use
Value, Esteem Value - Aims, Advantages and Application areas of Value
4 6
Engineering - Value Engineering Procedure - Break-even Analysis - Cost-
Benefit Analysis - Capital Budgeting - Process planning

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks , ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Assignment/ Internal Internal

Attendance Case Study/ Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject (Written) (Written )

10 15 12.5 12.5 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 Minimum 1 and  2 questions will be given from each module, out
Maximum 2 Questions of which 1 question should be answered. Each
from each module. question can have a maximum of 2 sub
50
 Total of 6 Questions, divisions. Each question carries 8 marks.
each carrying 3 marks (4x8 = 32 marks)
(6x3 =18marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Understand the fundamentals of various economic issues using laws K2

CO1 and learn the concepts of demand, supply, elasticity and production
function.
Develop decision making capability by applying concepts relating to K3
CO2 costs and revenue, and acquire knowledge regarding the functioning of
firms in different market situations.
Outline the macroeconomic principles of monetary and fiscal systems, K2
CO3
national income and stock market.
Make use of the possibilities of value analysis and engineering, and K3
CO4 solve simple business problems using break even analysis, cost benefit
analysis and capital budgeting techniques.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 - - - - - 1 - - - - 1 -

CO2 - - - - - 1 1 - - - 1 -

CO3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2 -

CO4 - - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 -

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Geetika, Piyali Ghosh
1 Managerial Economics Tata McGraw Hill, 2015
and Chodhury
H. G. Thuesen, W. J.
2 Engineering Economy PHI 1966
Fabrycky
3 Engineering Economics R. Paneerselvam PHI 2012
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Leland Blank P.E,
1 Engineering Economy Mc Graw Hill 7TH Edition
Anthony Tarquin P. E.
2 Indian Financial System Khan M. Y. Tata McGraw Hill 2011
Engineering Economics and Donald G. Newman,
3 Engg. Press, Texas 2002
analysis Jerome P. Lavelle
Contemporary Engineering Prentice Hall of India
4 Chan S. Park 2001
Economics Ltd
 SEMESTER S3/S4

ENGINEERING ETHICS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

Course Code UCHUT347 CIE Marks 50

2:0:0:0
Teaching Hours/Week
ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)
2
Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Equip with the knowledge and skills to make ethical decisions and implement gender-
sensitive practices in their professional lives.
2. Develop a holistic and comprehensive interdisciplinary approach to understanding
engineering ethics principles from a perspective of environment protection and sustainable
development.
3. Develop the ability to find strategies for implementing sustainable engineering solutions.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Fundamentals of ethics - Personal vs. professional ethics, Civic Virtue,
Respect for others, Profession and Professionalism, Ingenuity, diligence
and responsibility, Integrity in design, development, and research domains,
Plagiarism, a balanced outlook on law - challenges - case studies,
Technology and digital revolution-Data, information, and knowledge,
Cybertrust and cybersecurity, Data collection & management, High
technologies: connecting people and places-accessibility and social
1 impacts, Managing conflict, Collective bargaining, Confidentiality, Role
6

of confidentiality in moral integrity, Codes of Ethics.

Basic concepts in Gender Studies - sex, gender, sexuality, gender
spectrum: beyond the binary, gender identity, gender expression, gender
stereotypes, Gender disparity and discrimination in education,
employment and everyday life, History of women in Science & Technology,
Gendered technologies & innovations, Ethical values and practices in
 connection with gender - equity, diversity & gender justice, Gender policy
and women/transgender empowerment initiatives.
Introduction to Environmental Ethics: Definition, importance and
historical development of environmental ethics, key philosophical theories
(anthropocentrism, biocentrism, ecocentrism). Sustainable Engineering
Principles: Definition and scope, triple bottom line (economic, social and
environmental sustainability), life cycle analysis and sustainability metrics.

2 Ecosystems and Biodiversity: Basics of ecosystems and their functions, 6

Importance of biodiversity and its conservation, Human impact on
ecosystems and biodiversity loss, An overview of various ecosystems in
Kerala/India, and its significance. Landscape and Urban Ecology:
Principles of landscape ecology, Urbanization and its environmental impact,
Sustainable urban planning and green infrastructure.
Hydrology and Water Management: Basics of hydrology and water cycle,
Water scarcity and pollution issues, Sustainable water management practices,
Environmental flow, disruptions and disasters. Zero Waste Concepts and
Practices: Definition of zero waste and its principles, Strategies for waste
reduction, reuse, reduce and recycling, Case studies of successful zero waste
initiatives. Circular Economy and Degrowth: Introduction to the circular

3 economy model, Differences between linear and circular economies, 6

degrowth principles, Strategies for implementing circular economy practices
and degrowth principles in engineering. Mobility and Sustainable
Transportation: Impacts of transportation on the environment and climate,
Basic tenets of a Sustainable Transportation design, Sustainable urban
mobility solutions, Integrated mobility systems, E-Mobility, Existing and
upcoming models of sustainable mobility solutions.
Renewable Energy and Sustainable Technologies: Overview of renewable
energy sources (solar, wind, hydro, biomass), Sustainable technologies in
energy production and consumption, Challenges and opportunities in
renewable energy adoption. Climate Change and Engineering Solutions:
Basics of climate change science, Impact of climate change on natural and
4 human systems, Kerala/India and the Climate crisis, Engineering solutions to
6

mitigate, adapt and build resilience to climate change. Environmental

Policies and Regulations: Overview of key environmental policies and
regulations (national and international), Role of engineers in policy
implementation and compliance, Ethical considerations in environmental
 policy-making. Case Studies and Future Directions: Analysis of real-
world case studies, Emerging trends and future directions in environmental
ethics and sustainability, Discussion on the role of engineers in promoting a
sustainable future.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks , ESE: 50)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Continuous internal evaluation will be based on individual and group activities undertaken throughout
the course and the portfolio created documenting their work and learning. The portfolio will include
reflections, project reports, case studies, and all other relevant materials.

 The students should be grouped into groups of size 4 to 6 at the beginning of the semester.
These groups can be the same ones they have formed in the previous semester.
 Activities are to be distributed between 2 class hours and 3 Self-study hours.
 The portfolio and reflective journal should be carried forward and displayed during the 7th
Semester Seminar course as a part of the experience sharing regarding the skills developed
through various courses.

Sl. Item Particulars Group/I Marks

No. ndividua
l (G/I)

1 Reflective Weekly entries reflecting on what was learned, personal

I 5
Journal insights, and how it can be applied to local contexts.

2 Micro project 1 a) Perform an Engineering Ethics Case Study analysis and

prepare a report
G 8
1 b) Conduct a literature survey on ‘Code of Ethics for
(Detailed Engineers’ and prepare a sample code of ethics
documentation of
the project, 2. Listen to a TED talk on a Gender-related topic, do a literature
including survey on that topic and make a report citing the relevant G 5
methodologies, papers with a specific analysis of the Kerala context
findings, and
reflections) 3. Undertake a project study based on the concepts of
sustainable development* - Module II, Module III & Module G 12
IV

3 Activities 2. One activity* each from Module II, Module III & Module IV G 15

4 Final A comprehensive presentation summarising the key takeaways

Presentation from the course, personal reflections, and proposed future G 5
actions based on the learnings.

Total Marks 50
 *Can be taken from the given sample activities/projects

Evaluation Criteria:
● Depth of Analysis: Quality and depth of reflections and analysis in project reports and
case studies.
● Application of Concepts: Ability to apply course concepts to real-world problems and
local contexts.
● Creativity: Innovative approaches and creative solutions proposed in projects and reflections.
● Presentation Skills: Clarity, coherence, and professionalism in the final presentation.

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Develop the ability to apply the principles of engineering ethics in their
CO1 K3
professional life.
Develop the ability to exercise gender-sensitive practices in their
CO2 K4
professional lives
Develop the ability to explore contemporary environmental issues and
CO3 K5
sustainable practices.
Develop the ability to analyse the role of engineers in promoting
CO4 K4
sustainability and climate resilience.
Develop interest and skills in addressing pertinent environmental and
CO5 K3
climate-related challenges through a sustainable engineering approach.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO2 1 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO4 1 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2
 Reference Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
2nd edition
Ethics in Engineering Practice Cambridge University
1 Caroline Whitbeck & August
and Research Press & Assessment
2011
Virtue Ethics and Professional Cambridge University November
2 Justin Oakley
Roles Press & Assessment 2006
2nd edition
Cambridge University &
3 Sustainability Science Bert J. M. de Vries
Press & Assessment December
2023
Sustainable Engineering Cambridge University
4 Bhavik R. Bakshi, 2019
Principles and Practice Press & Assessmen
M Govindarajan, S
PHI Learning Private
5 Engineering Ethics Natarajan and V S 2012
Ltd, New Delhi
Senthil Kumar
Professional ethics and human New age international
6 RS Naagarazan 2006.
values (P) limited New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill
Mike W Martin and 4" edition,
7 Ethics in Engineering Publishing Company
Roland Schinzinger, 2014
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi

Suggested Activities/Projects:

Module-II
● Write a reflection on a local environmental issue (e.g., plastic waste in Kerala
backwaters or oceans) from different ethical perspectives (anthropocentric, biocentric,
ecocentric).
● Write a life cycle analysis report of a common product used in Kerala (e.g., a coconut,
bamboo or rubber-based product) and present findings on its sustainability.
● Create a sustainability report for a local business, assessing its environmental, social, and
economic impacts
● Presentation on biodiversity in a nearby area (e.g., a local park, a wetland, mangroves,
college campus etc) and propose conservation strategies to protect it.
● Develop a conservation plan for an endangered species found in Kerala.
● Analyze the green spaces in a local urban area and propose a plan to enhance urban
ecology using native plants and sustainable design.
● Create a model of a sustainable urban landscape for a chosen locality in Kerala.

Module-III
● Study a local water body (e.g., a river or lake) for signs of pollution or natural flow disruption and
suggest sustainable management and restoration practices.
● Analyse the effectiveness of water management in the college campus and propose improvements -
calculate the water footprint, how to reduce the footprint, how to increase supply through rainwater
harvesting, and how to decrease the supply-demand ratio
● Implement a zero waste initiative on the college campus for one week and document the challenges
and outcomes.
● Develop a waste audit report for the campus. Suggest a plan for a zero-waste approach.
● Create a circular economy model for a common product used in Kerala (e.g., coconut oil, cloth etc).
● Design a product or service based on circular economy and degrowth principles and present a
business plan.
● Develop a plan to improve pedestrian and cycling infrastructure in a chosen locality in Kerala

Module-IV
● Evaluate the potential for installing solar panels on the college campus including cost-benefit
analysis and feasibility study.
● Analyse the energy consumption patterns of the college campus and propose sustainable
alternatives to reduce consumption - What gadgets are being used? How can we reduce demand
using energy-saving gadgets?
● Analyse a local infrastructure project for its climate resilience and suggest improvements.
● Analyse a specific environmental regulation in India (e.g., Coastal Regulation Zone) and its impact
on local communities and ecosystems.
● Research and present a case study of a successful sustainable engineering project in Kerala/India
(e.g., sustainable building design, water management project, infrastructure project).
● Research and present a case study of an unsustainable engineering project in Kerala/India
highlighting design and implementation faults and possible corrections/alternatives (e.g., a housing
complex with water logging, a water management project causing frequent floods, infrastructure
project that affects surrounding landscapes or ecosystems).
 SEMESTER S3

ANALOG AND DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB

Course Code PCEOL307 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PCEOT205 Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. To design and develop various electronic circuits using discrete components and
OPAMPs.
2. To impart practical experience in the design and setup of digital circuits

Expt.
Experiments
No.
PART A
(Minimum 6 experiments are mandatory)
Pre-lab Assignment :
Measurement of current, voltage, frequency and phase shift of signal in a RC
network using oscilloscope (Mandatory)
Introduction to circuit simulation using any circuit simulation software and PCB
layout software. (Mandatory)
1 Clipping and Clamping circuits using diodes
2 Design and testing of series voltage regulator using Zener diode
RC coupled amplifier using BJT in CE configuration-Measurement of gain, BW and
3
plotting of frequency response.
Op-amp circuits – Design and set up of inverting and non-inverting amplifier, adder
4
circuits.
5 Op-amp circuits – Design and set up of integrator, and differentiator.
Basic comparator and Schmitt trigger circuits using Op-amp (Use comparator ICs such as
6
LM311).
Waveform generation– Square, triangular and saw tooth waveform generation using
7
OPAMPs.
 8 Astable and Monostable circuit using 555 timer IC.
PART B
(Minimum 6 experiments are mandatory)
Pre-lab Assignment:
Familiarisation of Logic Gates, Identification of typical logic ICs, Interpreting IC
datasheets (Mandatory).
1 Verification & Realisation of De Morgan’s theorem
2 Half adder & Full adder using gates.
3 4-bit adder/ subtractor & BCD adder using IC 7483
4 Study of multiplexer IC and realization of combinational circuits using multiplexers.
5 Realization of RS, T, D & JK flip flops
6 Realisation of ripple up and down counters and modulo-N counter using flip-flops
7 Design of synchronous up, down & modulo-N counters
8 Realization of 4-bit serial IN serial OUT registers using flip flops
9 Study of shift register IC 7495, ring counter and Johnsons counter

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work
experiments, Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with

Preparatory Execution of work/ valid inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50
 Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

 Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Design and implement various electronic circuits using diodes, Zener
CO1 K3
diode, BJT & FET

CO2 Design and implement basic circuits using OPAMP and 555 timers. K3

CO3 Use Simulation and PCB layout software for circuit design K3
Formulate digital functions using Boolean Algebra and verify
CO4 K3
experimentally.

CO5 Design and implement combinational and sequential logic circuits. K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2 2 2

CO2 2 2 2 2

CO3 1 1 3 3

CO4 3 1 1 3 3 2 3 3 1

CO5 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 1
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
1 Electronic Devices and Circuits Bell D. A Prentice Hall of India 2007
Electronic Devices and Circuit Boylestad R. L. and L. Pearson Education 10th Edition
2
Theory Nashelsky India 2009
New Age International
3 Linear Integrated Circuits Choudhury R 2008
Publishers
10th Edition
4 Digital Fundamentals Floyd T.L Pearson Education
2011
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Fundamentals of Analog
Floyd T.L Pearson Education 2012
Circuits
2 Analog and Digital Circuits and Millman J. and C. C.
Tata McGraw-Hill 2010
Systems Halkias

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
Integrated Circuits and Applications By Prof. Shaik Rafi Ahamed IIT Guwahati
1 https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLwdnzlV3ogoUdwipmit62VoN9fr1fP9Re
Lecture series on Digital Circuits & Systems by Prof.S.Srinivasan, Department of Electrical
2 Engineering, IIT Madras https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/106/117106086/
Lecture Series on Basic Electronics by Prof. T.S.Natarajan, Dept. of physics, IIT
3
Madrashttps://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL7987F30C41A9ADCB

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

 Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding

of the upcoming experiment.
 Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of
the theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

 Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
 Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
 Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

 Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation
of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
  Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.
4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

 Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying

principles during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

 Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
 Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
 Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
 Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.
2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

 Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

 Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

 Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.
4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

 Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
 Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

 Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER S3

DATA STRUCTURES LAB

Course Code PCEOL308 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) GBEST204 Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. To implement various linear data structures and applications using them

2. To implement various non-linear data structures and applications using them
3. To implement algorithms for various sorting techniques

Expt.
Experiments
No.
1 Implementation of linear search and binary search *
2 Implementation of Stack and linear Queue using arrays *
3 Implementation of Priority Queues, DEQUEUE and Circular Queues using arrays *
4 Conversion of expression from one notation to another notation *
5 Implementation of various linked list operations *
6 Implementation of stack and queue using linked list
7 Polynomial addition using linked list *
8 Polynomial multiplication using linked list.
9 Implementation of doubly linked list operations.
10 Implementation of circular linked list operations.
11 Implementation of binary search tree – creation, insertion, deletion, search *
12 Implementation of tree traversals – inorder, preorder, postorder
13 Implementation of sorting algorithms bubble sort, insertion sort and selection sort *
14 Implementation of Merge sort *
15 Implementation of Quick sort *
16 Implementation of BFS and DFS on graph *
Implementation of hash table using your own mapping functions and observe collisions
17
and overflow resolving schemes. *
*Mandatory experiments
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work
experiments, Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)
5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with

Preparatory Execution of work/ valid inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50
 Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

 Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Develop a time/space efficient program to sort a list of records and search for K3
CO1
a given key in the record.

CO2 Build programs using efficient data structure to represent given data. K3

CO3 Make use of appropriate data structure for various applications K3

CO4 Develop programs using linked lists and use them for various applications K3

Identify and use a suitable data structure and algorithm to solve a real world K3
CO5
problem.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 1 2 2 3 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Ellis Horowitz,Sartaj
Fundamentals of Data
1 Sahni and Susan Universities Press
Structures in C
Anderson-Freed
2 Classic Data Structures Samanta D Prentice Hall India 2/e, 2009

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Data Structures: A Pseudocode Richard F. Gilberg,
1 Cengage Learning 2/e, 2005
Approach with C Behrouz A. Forouzan
Aho A. V., J. E. Hopcroft
2 Data Structures and Algorithms Pearson Publication 1983
and J. D. Ullman
Introduction to Data Structures Tremblay J. P. and P. G.
3 Tata McGraw Hill 1995
with Applications Sorenson
Cambridge University
4 Advanced Data Structures Peter Brass 2008
Press
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102064
https://youtu.be/zWg7U0OEAoE
1 https://youtu.be/g1USSZVWDsY
https://youtu.be/PGWZUgzDMYI
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102064
2 https://youtu.be/PGWZUgzDMYI
https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106102064
https://youtu.be/tORLeHHtazM
3 https://youtu.be/eWeqqVpgNPg
https://youtu.be/9zpSs845wf8
https://youtu.be/KW0UvOW0XIo
4 https://youtu.be/gtWw_8VvHjk

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

 Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding

of the upcoming experiment.
 Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of
the theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

 Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
 Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
 Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

 Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation
of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
 Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.
 4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

 Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying

principles during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

 Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
 Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
 Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
 Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

 Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

 Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

 Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.
4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

 Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
 Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.
5. Record (5 Marks)

 Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER 4
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S4

MATHEMATICS FOR ELECTRICAL SCIENCE– 4

(Group B)

Course Code GBMAT401 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) Basic calculus Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarize students with the foundations of probabilistic and statistical analysis mostly used in
varied applications in engineering and science.
2. To expose the students to the basics of random processes essential for their subsequent study of
analog and digital communication

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Random variables, Discrete random variables and their probability
distributions, Cumulative distribution function, Expectation, Mean and
variance, Binomial distribution, Poisson distribution, Poisson distribution as
1 a limit of the binomial distribution, Joint pmf of two discrete random 9
variables, Marginal pmf, Independent random variables, Expected value of a
function of two discrete variables.
[Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 3.1 to 3.4, 3.6, 5.1, 5.2]
 Continuous random variables and their probability distributions, Cumulative
distribution function, Expectation, Mean and variance, Uniform, Normal and
Exponential distributions, Joint pdf of two Continuous random variables,
2 9
Marginal pdf, Independent random variables, Expectation value of a function
of two continuous variables.
[Text 1: Relevant topics from sections 3.1, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 5.1, 5.2]
Confidence Intervals, Confidence Level, Confidence Intervals and One-side
confidence intervals for a Population Mean for large and small samples
(normal distribution and t-distribution), Hypotheses and Test Procedures,
Type I and Type II error, z Tests for Hypotheses about a Population Mean
3 9
(for large sample), t Test for Hypotheses about a Population Mean (for small
sample), Tests concerning a population proportion for large and small
samples.
[Text 1: Relevant topics from 7.1, 7.2, 7.3, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4]
Random process concept, classification of process, Methods of Description
of Random process, Special classes, Average Values of Random Process,
Stationarity- SSS, WSS, Autocorrelation functions and its properties,
4 9
Ergodicity, Mean-Ergodic Process, Mean-Ergodic Theorem, Correlation
Ergodic Process, Distribution Ergodic Process.
[Text 2: Relevant topics from Chapter 6]

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Understand the concept, properties and important models of discrete
CO1 K3
random variables and to apply in suitable random phenomena.
Understand the concept, properties and important models of continuous
CO2 K3
random variables and to apply in suitable random phenomena.
Estimate population parameters, assess their certainty with confidence
CO3 intervals, and test hypotheses about population means and proportions K3
using z-tests and the one-sample t-test.
Analyze random processes by classifying them, describing their
properties, utilizing autocorrelation functions, and understanding their
CO4 K3
applications in areas like signal processing and communication
systems.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
9th edition,
Probability and Statistics for
1 Devore J. L Cengage Learning 2016
Engineering and the Sciences

Probability, Statistics and The McGraw-Hill 3rd edition,

2 T Veerarajan
Random Processes 2008

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Probability, Random Variables Papoulis, A. & Pillai, 4th edition,
1 McGraw Hill.
and Stochastic Processes, S.U., 2002
Introduction to Probability and
6th edition,
2 Statistics for Engineers and Ross, S. M. Academic Press
2020
Scientists
Probability and Random PHI Learning Private 3rd edition,
3 Palaniammal, S.
Processes Limited 2015
David F. Anderson, 1st edition,
4 Introduction to Probability Cambridge
Timo, Benedek 2017
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No. Link ID

1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105085/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105085/
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105085/
 SEMESTER S4

ELECTRICAL MACHINES

Course Code PCEOT402 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. At the end of the course the student will be able to explain the working and analyse the
performance of DC machines, transformers, synchronous machines and induction machines

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Constructional details of dc machines - armature winding - lap and wave
(concepts only) (1 hour)
DC Generator - principle of operation – emf equation – numerical
problems (1 hour)
Classification of DC generator – separately excited & self-excited –
1
steady-state equations – numerical problems (1 hour)
12
DC shunt generator - no-load (open circuit) characteristics – critical field
resistance, critical speed, voltage buildup - load characteristics – armature
reaction - cross magnetising & demagnetising effect (concepts only) (3
hours)
 Power flow diagram – losses and efficiency – maximum efficiency –
numerical problems (1 hour)
DC motor – back emf – torque equation – numerical problems (1 hour)
Classification of DC motors – steady-state equations – numerical
problems (1 hour)
Characteristics of shunt and series motors (1 hour)
Starting of DC motors (concepts only)
Power flow diagram – losses and efficiency – numerical problems (1
hour)
Testing - Swinburne’s test – numerical problems (1 hour)
Single phase transformers – constructional details - principle of operation
- EMF equation - ideal and practical transformer – numerical problems (2
hours)
Operation on no load and on load - phasor diagram at different load
conditions - equivalent circuit - voltage regulation – numerical problems
(2 hours)
2
Losses and efficiency - maximum efficiency – numerical problems (2
10
hours)
Testing of transformers - OC test, SC test – numerical problems (1 hour)
Autotransformer – saving of copper – numerical problems (1hour)
3- phase transformer – construction - different connections of 3-phase
transformers - Υ-Υ, Δ-Δ, Υ-Δ, Δ-Υ - numerical problems (2 hours)
Principle of Operation of 3-phase synchronous generator – classification -
constructional features - EMF equation – coil-span factor and distribution
factor (sinusoidal flux distribution only) – numerical problems (3 hours)
Synchronous generator on no-load – open circuit characteristics –
synchronous generator on load – armature reaction – effect of armature
3 reaction (2 hours) 11
Equivalent circuit - phasor diagram – voltage regulation –
predetermination of voltage regulation by emf and mmfmethod –
numerical problems (2 hours)
Parallel operation - synchronous generator on infinite bus-bar –
conditions – methods of synchronisation – dark lamp method - bright
 lamp method (2 hours)
Synchronous motor – rotating magnetic field (no derivation) - principle of
operation – starting methods (2 hours)
3-phase induction motor – principle of operation - classification -
constructional features – torque equation - torque-slip characteristics –
numerical problems (3 hours)
Phasor diagram - equivalent circuit (1 hour)
Power flow diagram - losses and efficiency – numerical problems (1
hour)
No-load and blocked-rotor tests – determination of equivalent circuit
4
parameters – numerical problems (1 hour) 11
Starting of induction motors – types of starters – DOL starter,
autotransformer starter, star-delta starter, rotor resistance starter (no
design) – numerical problems (3 hours)
Single-phase induction motors – double revolving field theory –torque
slip characteristics – types – split-phase, capacitor-start induction-run,
permanentcapacitor types – applications (2 hours)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out of
● Total of 8 Questions, each which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Describe the constructional details of DC machines and analyse the K3
CO1
performance DC generator under various load conditions
Explain the working and analyse the performance DC motor under K3
CO2
various load conditions
Analyse the performance of 1-phase and 3-phase transformers and K3
CO3
auto-transformers
Analyse the performance of synchronous generator under various load K3
CO4
conditions
CO5 Explain the working and starting methods of synchronous motor K2

Describe the constructional details and analyse the performance of 3- K3

CO6
phase and 1-phase induction motors.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3
CO6 3 3 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Electrical Machinery P.S. Bimbhra Khanna
1 7th edition 2021
Publishers
Electric Machines D P Kothari & I J Tata McGraw
2 5th edition 2017
Nagrath Hill
Theory & Performance of J.B. Gupta S K Kataria 15th edition
3
Electrical Machines 2022
 SEMESTER S4

COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE

Course Code PCEOT403 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week 3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60

(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Digital Electronics and Logic

Prerequisites (if any) System Design (PBEOT304) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. The course introduces the principles of computer organization and the basic architectural
concepts.
2. To be understand memory systems in digital computer.
3. To better with IO devices communication with processor.
4. To understand control logic design.
5. To be clear with pipeline concepts.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Basic Structure of computers –functional units - basic operational concepts -
bus structures. Memory locations and addresses -memory operations,
1 Instructions and instruction sequencing,addressing modes.
Basic processing unit – fundamental concepts – instruction cycle – execution 10
of a complete instruction -single bus and multiple bus organization.
Register transfer logic: Inter register transfer – arithmetic, logic and shift
2
micro-operations.
 Processor logic design: - processor organization – Arithmetic logic unit - 11
design of arithmetic circuit - design of logic circuit – Design of arithmetic logic
unit - status register – design of shifter - processor unit – design of
accumulator(Basic Concept Only).
Control Logic Design: Hardwired control-microprogrammed control-
Microinstructions, Microprogram Sequencing.
Arithmetic algorithms: Signed-Operand multiplication, Booth Algorithm, fast
3 multiplication-bit pair recoding of multipliers. 12
Pipelining: Basic principles, classification of pipeline processors, instruction
and arithmetic pipelines (Design examples not required), hazard detection and
resolution.
Memory system: Types of memory(Concepts only),Virtual memory, Content
addressable memory, cache memories - mapping functions.
I/O organization: Characteristics of I/O devices, Data transfer schemes -
4 Programmed controlled I/O transfer, Interrupt controlled I/O transfer.
11
Organization of interrupts - vectored interrupts – Servicing of multiple
input/output devices – Polling and daisy chaining schemes. Direct memory
accessing (DMA)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Identify the relevance of functional units, memory locations and
CO1 K2
addressing modes in a digital computer.

CO2 Illustrate the register transfer logic,Processor logic design. K2

Explain the implementation aspects of arithmetic algorithms and

CO3 K3
pipelining concept in a digital computer.

Demonstrate the control signals required for the execution of a given

CO4 K3
instruction.

Illustrate the organization of different types of memories and I/O

CO5 K2
organization.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 1 2 3

CO2 3 2 2 1 2 3

CO3 3 2 2 1 2 3

CO4 3 2 2 1 2 3

CO5 3 2 2 1 2 3

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Hamacher C., Z.
1 Computer Organization McGraw Hill 5/e,2011
Vranesic and S. Zaky,

Digital Logic & Computer

2 Mano M. M PHI 2004
Design

3 Computer System Architecture Mano M. M PHI 2007

 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Computer Organization and Patterson D.A. and J. Morgan

1 5/e,2013
Design L. Hennessy Kaufmann Publishers

Computer Organization and

2 Architecture: Designing for William Stallings Pearson, 9/e, 2013.

Performance

Computer Organization and

3 Chaudhuri P Prentice Hall 2/e, 2008.
Design

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=msqxkEKFg8I&list=PLgHucKw979AvcnTpPNZMZyOR
dL5HvTr9m,,
1
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=k_QgyvsqtwA&list=PLgHucKw979AvcnTpPNZMZyOR
dL5HvTr9m&index=12

2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0B-y1RPDXjs&list=PL59E5B57A04EAE09C&index=17

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AgoC0mlL6eQ&list=PLdS3u59E0DKjUKPcnCYxVxssE
kX2zo-kV&index=8

3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6CCwWCstDGc&list=PL1A5A6AE8AFC187B7&index=
9https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IQql2ojVzsU&list=PLEAYkSg4uSQ3dmkbCah82ek0KJ
npz_DxL&index=5

4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Wfau1WC5m4c
 SEMESTER S4

OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING USING JAVA

Course Code PBEOT404 CIE Marks 60

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

GBEST204 Programming
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
in C

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the basic concepts of object-oriented design techniques.

2. To give a thorough understanding of basics of Java programming.
3. To provide basic exposure to the Exception handling and Multithreaded programming etc.
4. To impart the techniques of Swing in Java and database connectivity.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction:
Approaches to Software Design - Functional Oriented Design, Object
Oriented Design, Case Study of Automated Fire Alarm System.
Object Modeling Using Unified Modeling Language (UML) – Basic
Object-Oriented concepts, UML diagrams, Use case Diagram, Class
1
diagram.
9
Introduction to Java - Java Buzzwords, Java program structure, Java
compiler, Bytecode, Java Virtual Machine (JVM), Comments, Lexical
Issues.
 Core Java Fundamentals:
Primitive Data types - Integers, Floating Point Types, Characters, Boolean.
Type Conversion and Casting, Variables, Arrays, Strings.
Operators - Arithmetic Operators, Bitwise Operators, Relational Operators,
Boolean Logical Operators, Assignment Operator, Conditional (Ternary)
Operator, Operator Precedence.
Control Statements - Selection Statements, Iteration Statements and Jump
2
Statements.
9
Object Oriented Programming in Java - Class Fundamentals, Declaring
Objects, Object Reference, Introduction to Methods, Constructors, this
Keyword, Method Overloading. Inheritance - Super Class, Sub Class,
Method Overriding-super Keyword.
Input/Output - I/O Basics, Reading Console Input, Writing Console
Output.
More features of Java:
Packages - Defining Package, Importing Packages.
Access Control-public, private, protected.
Exception Handling - Checked Exceptions, Unchecked Exceptions, try
3 9
Block and catch Clause, Multiple catch Clauses, Nested try Statements,
throw, throws and finally.
Multithreaded programming-Thread model, Creating threads, Creating
multiple threads, thread synchronization.
Graphical User Interface and Database support of Java:
Swings fundamentals - Swing Key Features, Model View Controller
(MVC), Components and Containers, Swing Packages, Swing Layout
Managers.
4
Event Handling in Swings: Delegation event model, event handling using 9
swing components-JFrame, JLabel, JButton, JTextField.
Java DataBase Connectivity (JDBC)- JDBC architecture, Creating and
Executing Queries – create table, delete, insert, select.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions.

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
module. which 1 question should be answered. Each question
 Total of 8 Questions, can have a maximum of 2 sub divisions. Each question 40
each carrying 2 marks carries 6 marks.
(8x2 =16 marks) (4x6 = 24 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Write Java programs using the object-oriented concepts - classes, K2
CO1
objects, constructors, data hiding, inheritance and polymorphism.
Utilise datatypes, operators, control statements, object-oriented class, object K3
CO2
concepts, I/O basics in Java to develop programs.
Illustrate how robust programs can be written in Java using packages, K3
CO3
exception handling mechanism and Multithreaded programming.
Write Graphical User Interface based application programs by utilising K3
CO4
Swing in Java and database connectivity.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 3 2 - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - -
CO4 2 3 3 3 3 - - - - 2 2 -

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
8th edition,
1 Java: The Complete Reference. Herbert Schildt Tata McGraw Hill
2011
4th
Fundamentals of Software
2 Rajib Mall PHI edition,
Engineering
2014
11th
Java How to Program, Early Paul Deitel, Harvey
3 Pearson Edition,
Objects Deitel
2018

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Programming JAVA a Primer BalagurusamyE McGraw Hill 5/e, 2014.

Object Oriented Systems

2 Development using the Unified Ali Bahrami McGraw-Hill Int. 2017
Modeling Language
Introduction to Java
3 Y. Daniel Liang Pearson 7/e, 2013.
Programming
 Core Java: An Integrated
4 Nageswararao R. Dreamtech Press 2008
Approach
5 Java in A Nutshell Flanagan D O'Reilly 5/e, 2005.
Object Oriented Design with
6 Barclay K.J. Savage, Elsevier 2004
UML and Java
7 Head First Java Sierra K. O'Reilly 2/e, 2005.

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105191

2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_cs08/preview
PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/
Presentation
Laboratory
Lecture delivery Project identification (Progress and Final
Work/
Presentations)
Workshops
Group
Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
discussion
Question answer Project Milestone Reviews,
Sessions/ Analytical thinking and Feedback,
Testing
Brainstorming self-learning Project reformation (If
Sessions required)
Poster Presentation/
Guest Speakers
Case Study/ Field Video Presentation: Students
(Industry Prototyping
Survey Report present their results in a 2 to 5
Experts)
minutes video
 Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Sl. No Evaluation for Allotted

Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer 4
Sessions
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3
4 Execution and Implementation 10
5 Final Presentations 5
6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3

Total 30

1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

 Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

 Research and background understanding
 Defined objectives and methodology

2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

 Individual contribution to the presentation

 Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

 Active participation and individual contribution

 Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

 Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

 Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
  Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

 Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

 Individual contribution to the presentation
 Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

 Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

 Innovation and originality in the project
 Creativity in solutions and approaches
 SEMESTER S4

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION

Course Code PEEET411 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3-0-0-0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PCEET205 Course Type Theory

Course objectives:

1. The objective of this course is to impart comprehensive understanding in the field of

electronic instrumentation, industrial instrumentation and communication systems.
SYLLABUS

Contact
Module Syllabus
Hours
Functional elements of electronic instrumentation system – Calibration
methods: Static, Dynamic, Field, Traceable, Master.
Transducers- Classification-Criteria for selection- Static and dynamic
characteristics- Zeroth and first order instruments and time responses.
Resistive transducers for liquid level and humidity
1 Inductive transducers- types and basic principles- LVDT- synchro 10
Capacitive transducers- types and basic principles- Thickness measurement
Piezoelectric transducers- Hall effect transducers-Basic principle and
applications
Electronic IC for sensor applications, Micro Electromechanical system
(MEMS)
 Advantages and Applications, MEMS micro sensors and actuators, MEMS
accelerometers Signal conditioning for instrumentation systems: Voltage to
Current Converter, Transducer bridges: null type and deflection bridges, AC
bridges using push pull transducers
Amplifiers: Instrumentation amplifiers- charge amplifiers- isolation amplifier
Role of filters: Low pass, high pass, band pass and band rejection filters,
Introduction to digital filters
Data Transmission- Types of Telemetry System- Modulation methods: Pulse
modulation, Pulse amplitude modulation, Pulse code modulation
2 General telemetry systems- Cable transmission of analog and digital data- Fibre 10
optic data transmission
Principles of time division and frequency division multiplexing-
Radio-wireless communication, WLAN architecture. Protocols: Field Bus,
Profibus , HART

Display methods and devices: Different types of display –display system

building blocks.
Data Presentation Element: Recorders-Strip Chart Recorder, Potentiometric
3 Recorder, X-Y Recorder. Magnetic recorder, Digital recorders- Data logger 9
Experiments and statistical analysis: Performance of experiment- characteristics
of experimental data- description of dispensed data- type of probability
distribution-probability error
Introduction to Process Control - Block diagram of the process control loop.
Analog and Digital DAS:
Programmable logic controllers (PLC), Organization- Hardware details- I/O-
Power supply- CPU- Standards Programming aspects- Ladder programming-
realization of AND, OR, NAND, NOR and XOR logic, the concept of latching,
4 10
Introduction to Timer/Counters, Numerical Exercises based on Timers and
Counters.
SCADA and DCS systems:
SCADA: Introduction, SCADA Architecture, Common System Components,
Supervision and Control, HMI, RTU and Supervisory Stations, Protocols-IEC
 60870-5-101 and DNP3.

Distributed Control System: Introduction, DCS Architecture, Control modes.

Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):
Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out of
 Total of 8 Questions, each which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions. 60

(4x9 = 36 marks)

(8x3 =24marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s Knowledge
Course Outcome
Level (KL)

K3
CO1 Identify the sensors/transducers suitable for individual
instrumental applications.
Design the signal conditioning circuits for industrial K3
CO2
instrumentation and automation.

Understand the concepts of data transmission methods K2

CO3
applicable to electronic instrumentation systems.

K3
CO4 Develop the logic for the process control applications using
PLC programming
K4
CO5 Analyze the performance of measurement systems using
statistical methods
K2
CO6 Describe the fundamental concepts of DCS and SCADA
systems
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO5 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO6 3 2 3 - 3 2 - - - - - 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books

Sl. Name of the Edition

Title of the Book Name of the Publisher
No Author/s and Year

A course in Electrical and Electronic K. Sawhney Dhanpat Rai & Co. 2011
1
Measurements & Instrumentation

A course in Electrical & Electronic J. B. Gupta S K Kataria & Sons 14 Ed.,

th

2
Measurement & Instrumentation 2014

Electrical Measurements & Golding E.W Wheeler Pub.

3
Measuring Instruments and Widdis

Electronic Instrumentation H. S. Kalsi McGraw Hill, New 4 Ed., 2019

th

4
Delhi

5 Principles of Electrical Measurement S Tumanski Taylor & Francis.

Electronic Instrumentation and David A Bel Oxford

6
Measurements

Programmable Logic Controllers William Elsevier India Pvt. Ltd 5 edition,

th

7
Bolton

SCADA: Supervisory Control and Stuart A. International Society 4 edition,

th

8
Data Acquisition Boyer, of Automation, 2010
 Reference Books

Sl. Edition and

Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
No Year

Modern Electronics Cooper W.D Prentice Hall of India

1
Instrumentation

Basic Electrical Stout M.B Prentice Hall

2
Measurements

Electronic Measurements & Oliver & Cage McGraw Hill

3
Instrumentation

Doebelin’s Measurements E.O Doebelin and D.N McGraw Hill Education 6 Ed.
th

4
Systems Manik (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Electrical and Electronics P.Purkait, B.Biswas, McGraw Hill Education 2013

5 Measurements S.Das and C. Koley (India) Pvt. Ltd.,
and Instrumentation

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No. Link ID

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105153/
1
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108147/

2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105153/

3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105153/

https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108147/
4
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105166/
 SEMESTER S4

RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES

Course Code PEEET412 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week 3:0:0:0

ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) NIL Course Type Theory

Course objectives:
1. To understand energy scenario, energy sources and their utilization
2. To explore society’s present needs and future energy demands
3. To study the principles of renewable energy conversion systems
4. To be exposed to energy conservation methods
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction: Principles of renewable energy; energy and sustainable

development, fundamentals and social implications. Worldwide renewable
energy availability, renewable energy availability in India, types of 9
renewable energy.

1 Wind Energy: Properties of wind, availability of wind energy in India, wind

velocity and power from wind (numerical problems); major problems
associated with wind power, Basic components of wind energy conversion
system (WECS); Classification of WECS- Horizontal axis- single, double
and multi-blade system. Vertical axis - Savonius and Darrieus types.
 Solar Energy: Fundamentals; Solar Radiation; Estimation of solar radiation
on horizontal and inclined surfaces; Solar radiation Measurements -
Pyrheliometers, Pyranometer, Sunshine Recorder. Solar Thermal systems:
2 concentrating and non-concentrating collectors - Flat plate collectors; Solar 9
tower electric power plant. Photovoltaic system for electric power generation
– Classification of PV system - Principle of Solar cell, advantages,
disadvantages and applications of solar photovoltaic system.

Biomass Energy: Introduction; Principle of biomass energy generation -

Biofuels; Biomass Resources; Biomass conversion technologies-fixed
dome type biogas plant; Urban waste to energy conversion; Biomass

3 gasification (Downdraft).
9
Tidal Power: Tides and waves as energy suppliers and their mechanics;
fundamental characteristics of tidal power, classification of tidal power
plants - harnessing tidal energy, advantages and limitations.

Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion: Principle of working, classification,

OTEC power stations in the world, environmental impacts associated with
9
OTEC.

Introduction to geothermal energy

4
Green Energy: Introduction, Fuel cells: Classification of fuel cells –
Hydrogen energy; Operating principles, Zero-energy Concepts. Benefits of
hydrogen energy, hydrogen production technologies (electrolysis method
only), hydrogen energy storage, applications of hydrogen energy, problem
associated with hydrogen energy.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out of
 Total of 8 Questions, each which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge Level
(KL)

Describe the environmental aspects of renewable energy resources in

CO1 comparison with various conventional energy systems, their prospects K1
and limitations.

CO2 Understand the concepts of wind energy. K1

Describe the use of solar energy and the various components used in the
CO3 energy production with respect to applications like-heating, cooling, K2
desalination, power generation.

Understand the concept of biomass energy resources and conversion

CO4 K2
principles of tidal energy.

Acquire the basic knowledge of ocean thermal energy conversion.

CO5 K1
Understand the principle of green energy and hydrogen energy.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 2

CO5 3 3 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books

Sl. Name of the Edition and

Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
No Publisher Year

Non-conventional energy 4 edition

th

1 G. D. Rai Khanna
sources 2023

Renewable energy Thomas E. Kissell, David M.

2 Pearson 2017
systems Buchla, Thomas L. Floyd,

Non-Conventional
3 Sawhney G. S. PHI Learning 2012
Energy Resources

Renewable energy Thomas E. Kissell, David M. Pearson

4 Pearson
systems Buchla, Thomas L. Floyd, 2017
 SEMESTER S4

MATHEMATICS FOR MACHINE LEARNING

Course Code PEEET413 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) NIL Course Type Theory

Course objectives:

1. The purpose of this course is to introduce mathematical foundations of basic Machine

Learning concepts among learners, on which Machine Learning systems are built.
2. Concepts in this course help the learners to understand the mathematical principles in
Machine Learning and aid in the creation of new Machine Learning solutions,
understand and debug existing ones, and learn about the inherent assumptions and
limitations of the current methodologies.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

LINEAR ALGEBRA: Systems of Linear Equations – Matrices, Solving

Systems of Linear Equations. Vector Spaces –Vector Spaces, Linear
1
Independence, Basis and Rank. Linear Mappings – Matrix Representation of 9
Linear Mappings, Basis Change, Image and Kernel.

2 ANALYTIC GEOMETRY, MATRIX DECOMPOSITIONS: Norms, Inner

 Products, Lengths and Distances, Angles and Orthogonality, Orthonormal Basis, 9
Orthogonal Complement, Orthogonal Projections – Projection into One
Dimensional Subspaces, Projection onto General Subspaces, Gram-Schmidt
Orthogonalization.

Determinant and Trace, Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, Cholesky

Decomposition, Eigen decomposition and Diagonalization, Singular Value
Decomposition, Matrix Approximation.
VECTOR CALCULUS: Differentiation of Univariate Functions - Partial
Differentiation and Gradients, Gradients of Vector Valued Functions, Gradients
of Matrices, Useful Identities for Computing Gradients. Back propagation and
3 9
Automatic Differentiation – Gradients in Deep Network, Automatic
Differentiation. Higher Order Derivatives- Linearization and Multivariate
Taylor Series.

Probability and Distributions : Construction of a Probability Space - Discrete

and Continuous Probabilities, Bayes’ Theorem. Summary Statistics and
Independence – Gaussian Distribution - Conjugacy and the Exponential Family -
Change of Variables/Inverse Transform.
4
9
Optimization : Optimization Using Gradient Descent - Gradient Descent With
Momentum. Constrained Optimization and Lagrange Multipliers - Convex
Optimization - Linear Programming - Quadratic Programming.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out of
 Total of 8 Questions, each which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Make use of the concepts, rules and results about linear equations, matrix K3
CO1 algebra, vector spaces, eigenvalues & eigenvectors and orthogonality &
diagonalization to solve computational problems

Perform calculus operations on functions of several variables and matrices, K3

CO2
including partial derivatives and gradients

Utilize the concepts, rules and results about probability, random variables, K3
additive & multiplicative rules, conditional probability, probability
CO3
distributions and Bayes’ theorem to find solutions of computational
problems

Train Machine Learning Models using unconstrained and constrained K3

CO4
optimization methods

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 2

CO2 3 2 2

CO3 3 2 1 2

CO4 3 2 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books

Sl. Edition
No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
and Year
Marc Peter Deisenroth, A. Cambridge University Press
1 Mathematics for
Aldo Faisal, and Cheng (freely available at https:// mml -
Machine Learning
Soon Ong book.github.io)

Reference Books

Sl. Name of the Edition

Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
No Publisher and Year

1 4th
Linear Algebra and Its Applications, Gilbert Strang
Edition
2 Linear Algebra Done Right Axler, Sheldon Springer 2015
Cambridge
3 Introduction to Applied Linear Stephen Boyd and
University 2018
Algebra Lieven Vandenberghe
Press
4 Pattern Recognition and Machine
Christopher M Bishop Springer 2006
Learning
Cambridge
5 Stephen Boyd and
Convex Optimization University 2004
Lieven Vandenberghe
Press
Learning with Kernels – Support Bernhard Scholkopf and
6 Vector Machines, Regularization, Smola, Alexander J MIT Press 2002
Optimization, and Beyond Smola
Cambridge
7 Information Theory, Inference, and
David J. C MacKay University 2003
Learning Algorithms
Press
8 Machine Learning: A Probabilistic
Kevin P Murphy MIT Press 2012
Perspective
9 The Nature of Statistical Learning
Vladimir N Vapnik Springer 2000
Theory
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No. Link ID

archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/111/107/111107137
1
onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc24_cs38/

archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/111/107/111107137
2
onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc24_cs38/

archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/111/107/111107137
3
onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc24_cs38/

archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/111/107/111107137
4
onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc24_cs38/
 SEMESTER S4

THEORY OF COMPUTATION

Course Code PEEET414 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course objectives:
1. Introduce the concept of formal languages.
2. Discuss the Chomsky classification of formal languages with discussion on grammar and
automata for regular, context-free, context sensitive and unrestricted languages.
3. Discuss the notions of decidability and halting problem.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction to formal language theory– Alphabets, Strings, Concatenation of

strings,

1 Languages , Regular Languages - Deterministic Finite State Automata (DFA)

(Proof of correctness of construction not required), Nondeterministic Finite 9
State Automata (NFA), Equivalence of DFA and NFA, Regular Grammar (RG),
Equivalence of RGs and DFA.

Regular Languages -Regular Expression (RE), Equivalence of REs and DFA,

2 Homomorphisms, Necessary conditions for regular languages, Closure
Properties of Regular Languages, DFA state minimization (No proof
 required).Context Free Grammar (CFG)- CFG representation of Context Free 9
Languages (proof of correctness is required), derivation trees and ambiguity,
Normal forms for CFGs

Context-Free Languages -Nondeterministic Pushdown Automata (PDA),

Deterministic Pushdown Automata (DPDA), Equivalence of PDAs and CFGs
3 9
(Proof not required), Pumping Lemma for Context-Free Languages (Proof not
required), Closure Properties of Context Free Languages

Context Sensitive Languages - Context Sensitive Grammar (CSG), Linear

Bounded Automata.

4 Turing Machines - Standard Turing Machine, Robustness of Turing Machine,

9
Universal Turing Machine, Halting Problem, Recursive and Recursively
Enumerable Languages. Chomsky classification of formal languages

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions
 Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out of
 Total of 8 Questions, each which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions. 60

(4x9 = 36 marks)

(8x3 =24marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s Knowledge
Course Outcome
Level (KL)

Classify a given formal language into Regular, Context-Free, K2

CO1
Context Sensitive, Recursive or Recursively Enumerable

Design finite state automata, regular grammar, and regular K3

CO2
representations for regular languages.

Design push-down automata and context-free grammar K3

CO3
representations for given context-free languages.

CO4 Design Turing machines as language acceptors or transducers. K3

CO5 Explain the notion of decidability. K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 - - - - - - - - 3

CO2 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 3

CO3 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 3

CO4 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 3

CO5 3 3 3 2 - - - - - - - 3

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Sl. Name of the Name of the Edition and

Title of the Book
No Author/s Publisher Year

Automata and
1 Dexter C. Kozen Springer 1999
Computability,

Reference Books

Sl. Name of the Edition

Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
No Publisher and Year

John E Hopcroft, Rajeev

Introduction to Automata Theory, Pearson
1 Motwani and Jeffrey D 3/e, 2007
Languages, and Computation Education
Ullman

Introduction To Theory of Cengage

2 Michael Sipser 2013
Computation, Publishers
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No. Link ID

1 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=77nkSUsQqJk

2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=77nkSUsQqJk

3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=77nkSUsQqJk

4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=77nkSUsQqJk
 SEMESTER S4

SOLID STATE DEVICES

Course Code PEEET417 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) GYEST104 Course Type Theory

Course objectives:

1. To design various analog circuits using discrete electronic devices.

2. To design and analyze different electronic circuits for various applications.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Wave shaping circuits: First order RC low pass and high pass filters,
Differentiator and Integrator, Diode clipping circuits, Diode clamping
circuits, Voltage multipliers
1 Transistor biasing: Concept of DC and AC load lines, Types -Fixed bias
11
circuit, Self-bias, voltage divider bias, Bias stabilization.
Switching Circuits: Astable, Bistable and Monostable multivibrators,
Schmitt Trigger.

BJT amplifiers: RC coupled amplifier –Design, Voltage gain and frequency

response. Small signal analysis of CE configuration - small signal hybrid-pi
2 model for mid and low frequency (Gain, Input and output impedance). High 11
frequency equivalent circuits of BJT, Miller effect, Analysis of high
frequency response of CE amplifier.
 Multistage amplifiers - Cascade and Cascode amplifiers: Design, Effect on
gain and bandwidth.

MOSFETs - MOSFET as an amplifier, Biasing of p-channel and n-channel

MOSFET circuits, Small signal equivalent circuit, Small signal Voltage gain,
current gain, input and output impedances of CS configuration, CS stage with
diode connected load.
3 Feedback topologies: Effect of positive and negative feedback on gain, 11
frequency response and distortion, Feedback topologies and its effect on
input and output impedance, Feedback amplifier circuits using BJT in each
feedback topologies (Analysis of only Voltage series feedback circuit is
required)

Oscillators: Introduction, Barkhausen criterion, Classification of oscillators -

RC phase shift, Wien bridge, Hartley, Colpitts and Crystal oscillators
(working principle and design equations of the circuits only). Analysis of RC
phase shift oscillator.
Power amplifiers: Classification, Transformer coupled class A power
4 amplifier, push pull class B and class AB power amplifiers, complementary
11
symmetry class B and class AB power amplifiers, Class C power amplifier
efficiency and distortion (no analysis required).
Regulated power supplies: Load and line regulation, Series voltage
regulator, shunt voltage regulator, Short circuit protection and fold back
protection.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out of
 Total of 8 Questions, each which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s Knowledge
Course Outcome
Level (KL)

CO1 Design and analyze the RC circuits and BJT biasing circuits K4

Perform small signal and high frequency analysis of BJT amplifier K3

CO2
circuits using equivalent models

CO3 Design and analyze MOSFET amplifier circuits K4

CO4 Design and analyze feedback amplifiers and oscillators K4

CO5 Design power amplifiers and voltage regulator circuits K4

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 3

CO2 3 3 - 3

CO3 3 3 2 3

CO4 3 3 2 3

CO5 3 1 2 3

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books

Sl. Name of the Edition and

Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
No Publisher Year

Electronic Devices and Robert Boylested and L.

1 Pearson
Circuit Theory Nashelsky 11/e,2017.

Sedra A S. and K. C. Oxford University

2 Microelectronic circuits 6/e,2013
Smith Press

Electronic Devices and Oxford University

3 David A Bell 5/e,2008
Circuits Press

Reference Books

Sl. Name of the Name of the Edition and

Title of the Book
No Author/s Publisher Year

Electronic circuits, Analysis and

1 Neamen D. McGraw Hill 3/e,2007
Design

Microelectronic Circuits – Analysis

2 Rashid M. H Cengage Learning 2/e,2011
and Design

3 Fundamentals of Microelectronics Razavi B. Wiley 2015

Millman J. and C.
4 Integrated Electronics McGraw Hill 2/e, 2010
Halkias
 SEMESTER S4

ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENT AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

Course Code PEEOT411 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3-0-0-0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) GYEST104 Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. The basic objective of this course is to introduce the concepts of electrical measurement
systems and instrumentation.
2. Explain the principle of operation and construction of basic instruments for the
measurement of basic circuit parametersand magnetic quantities.
3. To measure the passiveparameters using bridge circuits, sensors and transducers.
4. Modern digital instrumentation systems are also introduced through this course.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Functional Elements of Measurements Systems- Block Schematic and
brief operation of building blocks.
1 9
Standards of Measurements- Static characteristics (accuracy, precision,
linearity, resolution), Need for calibration, Types of errors
 Instruments- Classification; Operating Forces and Torques: deflecting,
controlling and damping torques- Gravity and spring control; air, fluid
friction and eddy current damping.
Measurement of Voltage and Current- Moving Coil and Moving Iron types.
Range Extension – shunts and multipliers (Include simple problems of range
extension)
Magnetic Measurement- Flux Meter, Determination of BH Curve -
Hysteresis Loop (Method of Reversal).
Measurement of Resistance, Wheatstone’s Bridge, Kelvin’s Double Bridge
(Simple Problems), Loss of Charge Method, Measurement of Earth
2 Resistance.
Measurement of Inductance- Maxwell's Inductance Bridge, Measurement
7

of Capacitance - Schering's Bridge, Measurement of Frequency- Wien

Bridge (Include Simple Problems).
Q-meter, LCR Meters (Description only).
Measurement of Power and Energy: Measurement of Power using
Dynamometer type wattmeter, Three phase Power Measurement using Two
Wattmeter Method (Include Phasor Diagrams and Expressions, Include
simple problems of two wattmeter method)
Measurement of Energy Using Induction type Energy Meter, Two Element
3 10
Energy Meter.
Instrument Transformers-CT and PT- Principle of Operation- Range
Extension.((Description Only)
Basic Principles of Electronic Multimeter, Digital Voltmeter. Digital Energy
Meter, TOD Meter, Smart Metering, Bidirectional Meters (Description Only)

Block Schematic of electronic instrumentation system – role of

sensors and transducers –
Classification of Temperature transducers-Principle of operation of
4
Thermistors and RTD – 10
Classification of flow transducers- Principle of operation of
Electromagnetic and ultrasonic types
 Strain gauge: Basic working principle, types and applications;
Measurement of angular speed and luminous intensity –
Principles of Digital Data Acquisition systems-Role of Signal
conditioning systems (Basic Principles only)- Phasor Measurement Unit
(Block Schematic and Description Only)
CRO, DSO and Harmonic Analysers: Block Diagram, Basic Principles
and applications only
Virtual Instrumentation Systems: Block schematic and Description
onlyIOT and Data analytics for Industrial Process- Case study on Smart
Grid

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.

module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Classify various parameters and errors associated with measuring K2

CO1
instruments.

Apply suitable methods for the measurement of current, voltage, K3

CO2
power and energy.

Use suitable methods for the measurement of magnetic K3

CO3
quantities, resistance, inductance and capacitance.

Describe the working principle, selection criteria and K2

CO4 applications of various sensors and transducers in relation to
measurements systems.

CO5 Explain the operation of digital measurement systems. K2

Discuss the applications of modern instrumentation schemes for K2

CO6
industrial process

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 3 - - - 2 - - - - - 2

CO3 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2

CO4 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO5 3 2 - - 2 - - - - - - 2

CO6 3 2 3 - 3 2 - - - - - 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
A course in Electrical and A. K. Sawhney DhanpatRai& Co. 2011
1 Electronic Measurements &
Instrumentation
A course in Electrical & J. B. Gupta S K Kataria& Sons 14th Ed.,
2 Electronic Measurement & 2014
Instrumentation
Electrical Measurements & Golding E.W and Widdis Wheeler Pub.
3
Measuring Instruments
Electronic Instrumentation H. S. Kalsi McGraw Hill, New 4th Ed.,
4
Delhi 2019
Principles of Electrical S Tumanski Taylor & Francis.
5
Measurement
Electronic Instrumentation and David A Bell Oxford
6
Measurements
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Modern Electronics Cooper W.D Prentice Hall of India
1
Instrumentation
Basic Electrical Stout M.B Prentice Hall
2
Measurements
Electronic Measurements Oliver & Cage McGraw Hill
3
& Instrumentation
Doebelin’s Measurements E.O Doebelin and D.N Manik McGraw Hill 6th Ed.
4 Systems Education (India) Pvt.
Ltd.
Electrical and Electronics P.Purkait, B.Biswas, S.Das McGraw Hill 2013
5 Measurements and C. Koley Education (India) Pvt.
and Instrumentation Ltd.,

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105153/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108147/
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105153/
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/105/108105153/
5 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/108/108/108108147/
6 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105166/
 SEMESTER S4

ECONOMICS FOR ENGINEERS

(Common to All Branches)

Course Code UCHUT346 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
2:0:0:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Understanding of finance and costing for engineering operation, budgetary planning and
control
2. Provide fundamental concept of micro and macroeconomics related to engineering industry
3. Deliver the basic concepts of Value Engineering.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Basic Economics Concepts - Basic economic problems – Production

Possibility Curve – Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility – Law of
Demand - Law of supply – Elasticity - measurement of elasticity and its
1 6
applications – Equilibrium- Changes in demand and supply and its effects

Production function - Law of variable proportion – Economies of Scale –

Internal and External Economies – Cobb-Douglas Production Function
 Cost concepts – Social cost, private cost – Explicit and implicit cost – Sunk
cost - Opportunity cost - short run cost curves - Revenue concepts
2 6
Firms and their objectives – Types of firms – Markets - Perfect Competition
– Monopoly - Monopolistic Competition - Oligopoly (features and
equilibrium of a firm)

Monetary System – Money – Functions - Central Banking –Inflation -

Causes and Effects – Measures to Control Inflation - Monetary and Fiscal
policies – Deflation

Taxation – Direct and Indirect taxes (merits and demerits) - GST

3 6
National income – Concepts - Circular Flow – Methods of Estimation and
Difficulties - Stock Market – Functions- Problems faced by the Indian stock
market-Demat Account and Trading Account – Stock market Indicators-
SENSEX and NIFTY

Value Analysis and value Engineering - Cost Value, Exchange Value, Use
Value, Esteem Value - Aims, Advantages and Application areas of Value
4 6
Engineering - Value Engineering Procedure - Break-even Analysis - Cost-
Benefit Analysis - Capital Budgeting - Process planning

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks , ESE:50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Assignment/
Internal Internal
Case Study
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
/
(Written) (Written )
Microproject

10 15 12.5 12.5 50
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● Minimum 1 and 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
Maximum 2 Questions which 1 question should be answered. Each question
from each module. can have a maximum of 2 sub divisions. Each question
50
● Total of 6 Questions, carries 8 marks.
each carrying 3 marks
(4x8 = 32 marks)
(6x3 =18marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Understand the fundamentals of various economic issues using laws K2

CO1 and learn the concepts of demand, supply, elasticity and production
function.
Develop decision making capability by applying concepts relating to K3
CO2 costs and revenue, and acquire knowledge regarding the functioning of
firms in different market situations.
Outline the macroeconomic principles of monetary and fiscal systems, K2
CO3
national income and stock market.
Make use of the possibilities of value analysis and engineering, and K3
CO4 solve simple business problems using break even analysis, cost benefit
analysis and capital budgeting techniques.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 - - - - - 1 - - - - 1 -
CO2 - - - - - 1 1 - - - 1 -
CO3 - - - - 1 - - - - - 2 -
CO4 - - - - 1 1 - - - - 2 -

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Geetika, Piyali Ghosh
1 Managerial Economics Tata McGraw Hill, 2015
and Chodhury

H. G. Thuesen, W. J.
2 Engineering Economy PHI 1966
Fabrycky

3 Engineering Economics R. Paneerselvam PHI 2012

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Leland Blank P.E,
1 Engineering Economy Mc Graw Hill 7TH Edition
Anthony Tarquin P. E.

2 Indian Financial System Khan M. Y. Tata McGraw Hill 2011

Engineering Economics and Donald G. Newman,

3 Engg. Press, Texas 2002
analysis Jerome P. Lavelle

Contemporary Engineering Prentice Hall of India

4 Chan S. Park 2001
Economics Ltd
 SEMESTER S3/S4

ENGINEERING ETHICS AND SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

Course Code UCHUT347 CIE Marks 50

2:0:0:0
Teaching Hours/Week
ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)
2
Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Equip with the knowledge and skills to make ethical decisions and implement gender-sensitive
practices in their professional lives.
2. Develop a holistic and comprehensive interdisciplinary approach to understanding engineering
ethics principles from a perspective of environment protection and sustainable development.
3. Develop the ability to find strategies for implementing sustainable engineering solutions.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Fundamentals of ethics - Personal vs. professional ethics, Civic Virtue,
Respect for others, Profession and Professionalism, Ingenuity, diligence
and responsibility, Integrity in design, development, and research domains,
Plagiarism, a balanced outlook on law - challenges - case studies,
Technology and digital revolution-Data, information, and knowledge,
Cybertrust and cybersecurity, Data collection & management, High
1 technologies: connecting people and places-accessibility and social
6

impacts, Managing conflict, Collective bargaining, Confidentiality, Role

of confidentiality in moral integrity, Codes of Ethics.
Basic concepts in Gender Studies - sex, gender, sexuality, gender
spectrum: beyond the binary, gender identity, gender expression, gender
stereotypes, Gender disparity and discrimination in education,
 employment and everyday life, History of women in Science & Technology,
Gendered technologies & innovations, Ethical values and practices in
connection with gender - equity, diversity & gender justice, Gender policy
and women/transgender empowerment initiatives.
Introduction to Environmental Ethics: Definition, importance and
historical development of environmental ethics, key philosophical theories
(anthropocentrism, biocentrism, ecocentrism). Sustainable Engineering
Principles: Definition and scope, triple bottom line (economic, social and
environmental sustainability), life cycle analysis and sustainability metrics.

2 Ecosystems and Biodiversity: Basics of ecosystems and their functions, 6

Importance of biodiversity and its conservation, Human impact on
ecosystems and biodiversity loss, An overview of various ecosystems in
Kerala/India, and its significance. Landscape and Urban Ecology:
Principles of landscape ecology, Urbanization and its environmental impact,
Sustainable urban planning and green infrastructure.
Hydrology and Water Management: Basics of hydrology and water cycle,
Water scarcity and pollution issues, Sustainable water management practices,
Environmental flow, disruptions and disasters. Zero Waste Concepts and
Practices: Definition of zero waste and its principles, Strategies for waste
reduction, reuse, reduce and recycling, Case studies of successful zero waste
initiatives. Circular Economy and Degrowth: Introduction to the circular

3 economy model, Differences between linear and circular economies, 6

degrowth principles, Strategies for implementing circular economy practices
and degrowth principles in engineering. Mobility and Sustainable
Transportation: Impacts of transportation on the environment and climate,
Basic tenets of a Sustainable Transportation design, Sustainable urban
mobility solutions, Integrated mobility systems, E-Mobility, Existing and
upcoming models of sustainable mobility solutions.
Renewable Energy and Sustainable Technologies: Overview of renewable
energy sources (solar, wind, hydro, biomass), Sustainable technologies in

4 energy production and consumption, Challenges and opportunities in 6

renewable energy adoption. Climate Change and Engineering Solutions:
Basics of climate change science, Impact of climate change on natural and
 human systems, Kerala/India and the Climate crisis, Engineering solutions to
mitigate, adapt and build resilience to climate change. Environmental
Policies and Regulations: Overview of key environmental policies and
regulations (national and international), Role of engineers in policy
implementation and compliance, Ethical considerations in environmental
policy-making. Case Studies and Future Directions: Analysis of real-
world case studies, Emerging trends and future directions in environmental
ethics and sustainability, Discussion on the role of engineers in promoting a
sustainable future.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks , ESE: 50)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Continuous internal evaluation will be based on individual and group activities undertaken throughout the
course and the portfolio created documenting their work and learning. The portfolio will include
reflections, project reports, case studies, and all other relevant materials.

 The students should be grouped into groups of size 4 to 6 at the beginning of the semester. These
groups can be the same ones they have formed in the previous semester.
 Activities are to be distributed between 2 class hours and 3 Self-study hours.
 The portfolio and reflective journal should be carried forward and displayed during the 7th
Semester Seminar course as a part of the experience sharing regarding the skills developed
through various courses.
Sl. Item Particulars Group/I Marks
No. ndividua
l (G/I)

1 Reflective Weekly entries reflecting on what was learned, personal I 5

Journal insights, and how it can be applied to local contexts.

2 Micro project 1 a) Perform an Engineering Ethics Case Study analysis and G 8

prepare a report

1 b) Conduct a literature survey on ‘Code of Ethics for

(Detailed Engineers’ and prepare a sample code of ethics
documentation of
the project, 2. Listen to a TED talk on a Gender-related topic, do a literature G 5
including survey on that topic and make a report citing the relevant
methodologies, papers with a specific analysis of the Kerala context
findings, and
reflections) 3. Undertake a project study based on the concepts of G 12
sustainable development* - Module II, Module III & Module
IV

3 Activities 2. One activity* each from Module II, Module III & Module IV G 15

4 Final A comprehensive presentation summarising the key takeaways G 5

Presentation from the course, personal reflections, and proposed future
actions based on the learnings.

Total Marks 50

*Can be taken from the given sample activities/projects

Evaluation Criteria:
● Depth of Analysis: Quality and depth of reflections and analysis in project reports and case
studies.
● Application of Concepts: Ability to apply course concepts to real-world problems and
local contexts.
● Creativity: Innovative approaches and creative solutions proposed in projects and reflections.
● Presentation Skills: Clarity, coherence, and professionalism in the final presentation.
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Develop the ability to apply the principles of engineering ethics in their K3
CO1
professional life.
Develop the ability to exercise gender-sensitive practices in their K4
CO2
professional lives
Develop the ability to explore contemporary environmental issues and K5
CO3
sustainable practices.
Develop the ability to analyse the role of engineers in promoting K4
CO4
sustainability and climate resilience.
Develop interest and skills in addressing pertinent environmental and K3
CO5
climate-related challenges through a sustainable engineering approach.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO2 1 3 2 3 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO4 1 3 3 2 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 2 3 2 2
 Reference Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
2nd edition
Ethics in Engineering Practice Cambridge University
1 Caroline Whitbeck & August
and Research Press & Assessment
2011
Virtue Ethics and Professional Cambridge University November
2 Justin Oakley
Roles Press & Assessment 2006
2nd edition
Cambridge University &
3 Sustainability Science Bert J. M. de Vries
Press & Assessment December
2023
Sustainable Engineering Cambridge University
4 Bhavik R. Bakshi, 2019
Principles and Practice Press & Assessmen
M Govindarajan, S
PHI Learning Private
5 Engineering Ethics Natarajan and V S 2012
Ltd, New Delhi
Senthil Kumar
Professional ethics and human New age international
6 RS Naagarazan 2006.
values (P) limited New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill
Mike W Martin and 4" edition,
7 Ethics in Engineering Publishing Company
Roland Schinzinger, 2014
Pvt Ltd, New Delhi

Suggested Activities/Projects:

Module-II
● Write a reflection on a local environmental issue (e.g., plastic waste in Kerala backwaters or
oceans) from different ethical perspectives (anthropocentric, biocentric, ecocentric).
● Write a life cycle analysis report of a common product used in Kerala (e.g., a coconut, bamboo
or rubber-based product) and present findings on its sustainability.
● Create a sustainability report for a local business, assessing its environmental, social, and
economic impacts
● Presentation on biodiversity in a nearby area (e.g., a local park, a wetland, mangroves, college
campus etc) and propose conservation strategies to protect it.
● Develop a conservation plan for an endangered species found in Kerala.
● Analyze the green spaces in a local urban area and propose a plan to enhance urban
ecology using native plants and sustainable design.
● Create a model of a sustainable urban landscape for a chosen locality in Kerala.
Module-III
● Study a local water body (e.g., a river or lake) for signs of pollution or natural flow disruption and
suggest sustainable management and restoration practices.
● Analyse the effectiveness of water management in the college campus and propose improvements -
calculate the water footprint, how to reduce the footprint, how to increase supply through rainwater
harvesting, and how to decrease the supply-demand ratio
● Implement a zero waste initiative on the college campus for one week and document the challenges and
outcomes.
● Develop a waste audit report for the campus. Suggest a plan for a zero-waste approach.
● Create a circular economy model for a common product used in Kerala (e.g., coconut oil, cloth etc).
● Design a product or service based on circular economy and degrowth principles and present a business
plan.
● Develop a plan to improve pedestrian and cycling infrastructure in a chosen locality in Kerala

Module-IV
● Evaluate the potential for installing solar panels on the college campus including cost-benefit analysis
and feasibility study.
● Analyse the energy consumption patterns of the college campus and propose sustainable alternatives to
reduce consumption - What gadgets are being used? How can we reduce demand using energy-saving
gadgets?
● Analyse a local infrastructure project for its climate resilience and suggest improvements.
● Analyse a specific environmental regulation in India (e.g., Coastal Regulation Zone) and its impact on
local communities and ecosystems.
● Research and present a case study of a successful sustainable engineering project in Kerala/India (e.g.,
sustainable building design, water management project, infrastructure project).
● Research and present a case study of an unsustainable engineering project in Kerala/India highlighting
design and implementation faults and possible corrections/alternatives (e.g., a housing complex with
water logging, a water management project causing frequent floods, infrastructure project that affects
surrounding landscapes or ecosystems).
 SEMESTER S4

ELECTRICAL MACHINES LAB

Course Code PCEOL407 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) Nil Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. Provide practical experience in operation and testing of DC machines, transformers, synchronous

machines and induction machines.

Expt. No. Experiments

Open circuit characteristics of DC shunt generator (CO1)

Objectives:
a) Predetermine the OCC at different speeds
1
b) Determine the critical field resistance
c) Determine the maximum voltage built up with given shunt field resistance
d) Determine the critical speed for a given shunt field resistance
Load test on DC shunt generator (CO1)
2 Objectives:
Determine the external and internal characteristics
 Brake test on DC shunt motor (CO2)
Objectives:
Plot the following characteristics
3
a) Performance characteristics
b) Electrical characteristics
c) Mechanical characteristics
Brake test on DC series motor (CO2)
Objectives:
Plot the following characteristics
4
a) Performance characteristics
b) Electrical characteristics
c) Mechanical characteristics
Swinburne’s test on a DC shunt machine (CO3)
Objectives:
5
a) Predetermine the efficiency while DC machine is acting as generator and motor
b) Plot the efficiency curves while DC machine is acting as generator and motor
OC and SC tests on single-phase transformer (CO4)
Objectives:
a) Predetermine the voltage regulation and efficiency at different loads and power
factors.
b) Determine the equivalent circuit referred to LV side and HV side
6
c) Plot the voltage regulation vs power factor curves at full-load.
d) Plot the efficiency curve at 0.8power factor.
e) Determine the power factor at which the voltage regulation is zero
f) Determine the load at which maximum efficiency occurs and the maximum
efficiency.
Load test on single-phase transformer (CO4)
Objectives:
7
Determine the voltage regulation and efficiency at different loads and at unity power
factor.
 Load test on a 3-phase squirrel cageinduction Motor (CO5)
Objectives:
8
Start the motor using auto transformer or star-delta starterand plot the performance
characteristics
Load test on a 3-phase Slip Ring Induction Motor (CO5)
Objectives:
9
Start the motor using auto transformer or rotor resistance starter and plot the
performance characteristics
No load and block rotor tests on a three-phase Squirrel Cage Induction Motor
(CO5)
10
Objectives:
Determine the equivalent circuit parameters
Load Test on a single-phase Induction Motor (CO5)
Objectives:
11
Perform load test on single-phase induction motor and plot the performance
characteristics
Regulation of a three phase Alternator by emf and mmf methods (CO6)
Objectives:
12
Predetermine the regulation of alternator by emf and mmf methods at 0.8pf lag, upf and
0.8pf lead
Synchronization of a 3-phase synchronous generator (CO6)
13 Objectives:
Synchronize the alternator by dark lamp or bright lamp method
NOTE: A minimum of TWELVE experiments are mandatory out of the thirteen listed
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work
experiments, Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)

5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with

Preparatory Execution of work/ valid inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Analyze the performance of DC generators by conducting load/no-load tests K3
CO2 Sketch the performance characteristics of DC shunt and series motors K3
Investigate the losses and efficiency in DC machines by conducting no-load K3
CO3
tests
Examine the performance of single-phase transformers by conducting K3
CO4
load/no-load tests
Analyze the performance of single-phase and 3-phase induction motors by K3
CO5
conducting load/no-load tests
Analyze the performance of isolated/grid connected 3-phase synchronous K3
CO6
generators.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 3 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 2 3 2 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Electrical Machinery P.S. Bimbhra Khanna Publishers 7th edition
1
2021
Electric Machines D P Kothari & I J Tata McGraw Hill 5th edition
2
Nagrath 2017

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding of

the upcoming experiment.
● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of the
theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of experiments,

and following safety protocols.
● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation of
experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.
 4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva, and
record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing materials/equipment.
● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the experiment.
● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or programming
task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.
4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.
5. Record (5 Marks)

● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER S4

OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING (JAVA) LAB

Course Code PCEOL408 CIE Marks 50
Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Programming in C
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Lab
(GBEST204)

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce Object Oriented Concepts-constructors, inheritance, method overloading, &

overriding and polymorphism in Java.

2. To practice robust application programs in Java using exceptional handling and threads.

3.To design and deploy applications using Java.

Expt.
Experiments
No.

(A) Basic programs using data types, operators and control statements in Java:

1 Write a basic Java program to print any string to console.

2 Write a java program to find the average of the three numbers entered by the user.

3 Write a Java program to find the frequency of a given character in a string. **

4 Write a Java program to multiply two given matrices. **

(B) Utility programs in java:
 Write a menu driven Java program to

(1) create a vector containing the name of 5 students

(2) insert an element to third position

5
(3) insert another 3 elements to the end of the vector

(4) delete an element from 2nd position

(5) delete all elements from the vector**

Write a Java program that reads a line of integers, and then displays each integer, and the
6
sum of all the integers [Use String Tokenizer class of java. util] **

Write a Java program that selects a random element from a given array of strings. The
7 array should be populated with at least five different color names.[Use Random class of
java.util]

Write a Java program that displays the calendar for a specified month and year. The
8 program should take the month and year as input and print the calendar for that month,
showing the correct days of the week for each date.

(C) Object Oriented Programming Concepts: Problems on the use of constructors, inheritance,
method overloading & overriding, polymorphism:

Write a java program to create class Student with instance variables rollno and name.
Create two student objects and initialize the value to these objects by invoking the insert
9
Record method. Display the state (data) of the objects by invoking the display
Information() method. **

Write a java program to create class Student with instance variables id and name. Create
10 two student objects and initialize the value to these objects by invoking parameterized
constructor.
 Write a Java program to calculate the area of different shapes namely circle, rectangle, and
11 triangle using the concept of method overloading. **

Write a Java program which creates a class named 'Employee' having the following
members: Name, Age, Phone number, Address, Salary. It also has a method named
'printSalary( )' which prints the salary of the Employee. Two classes 'Officer' and
12 'Manager' inherits the 'Employee' class. The 'Officer' and 'Manager' classes have data
members 'specialization' and 'department' respectively. Now, assign name, age, phone
number, address and salary to an officer and a manager by making an object of both of
these classes and print the same. (Exercise to understand inheritance). **

Write two Java classes Employee and Engineer. Engineer should inherit from Employee
class. Employee class to have two methods display() and calcSalary().

Write a program to display the engineer salary and to display from Employee class using a
single object instantiation(i.e., only one object creation is allowed).
13
display () only prints the name of the class and does not return any value.

Ex. “Name of class is Employee.”

calcSalary() in Employee displays “Salary of employee is 10000” and calcSalary() in

Engineer displays “Salary of employee is 20000.” **

(D) Exception handling and multi-threading applications:

14 Write a Java program that shows the usage of try, catch, throws and finally. **

15 Write a Java program that shows thread synchronization. **

Write a Java program that implements a multi-threaded program which has two threads.
16 First thread displays “java is simple” every 1 second and second thread displays “Java is
robust” every two second.

(E) Graphics Programming and Java DataBase Connectivity (JDBC):

 Write a Java program that works as a simple calculator. Arrange Buttons for digits and the
17 + - * % operations properly. Add a text field to display the result. Handle any possible
exceptions like divide by zero. Use Java Swing. **

Write a Java program using Swing to create a frame with two text fields, two labels and a
18 button. The interface has to accept a number in the first text field. On pressing the button,
factorial of the number should be displayed in the second text field.

Write a Java program to display all records from a table using Java Database Connectivity
19
(JDBC). **

**Mandatory

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work
experiments, Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)

5 25 20 50
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with

Preparatory Execution of work/ valid inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

● Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only upon
submitting the duly certified record.

● Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Implement the Object-Oriented concepts- constructors, inheritance, method
CO1 overloading and overriding and polymorphism in Java. K3

CO2 Implement robust application programs in Java using exceptional handling K3

Implement application programs in Java using multithreading and database K3

CO3 connectivity.

Implement GUI based application programs by utilizing event handling K3

CO4 features and Swing in Java.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 2 3 2 - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 - - - - - - -
CO4 2 3 3 3 3 - - 2 - 2 2 -
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
8thEdition,
1 Java: The Complete Reference. Herbert Schildt Tata McGraw Hill
2011
Java How to Program, Early Paul Deitel, Harvey 7th
2 Pearson
Objects Deitel Edition

Reference Books
Name of the
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Edition and Year
Publisher
Introduction to Java Y. Daniel Liang Pearson 7th Edition, 2013.
1
Programming
Abraham
9th Edition,
2 Operating System Concepts Silberschatz, Peter B Wiley India
2015.
Galvin, Greg Gagne
Core Java: An Integrated
3 Nageswara Rao R. Dreamtech Press 2008
Approach
4 Java in A Nutshell Flanagan D O'Reilly 5/e, 2005.
Object Oriented Design with
5 Barclay K.J. Savage, Elsevier 2004
UML and Java
6 Head First Java Sierra K. O'Reilly 2/e, 2005.
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105191

2 https://www.guru99.com/java-tutorial.html
3 https://www.programiz.com/java-programming

4 https://www.w3schools.com/java/default.asp

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

● Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test understanding of

the upcoming experiment.
● Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding of the
theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

● Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of experiments,

and following safety protocols.
● Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
● Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

● Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper documentation of
experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
● Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.
 4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

● Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying principles
during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva, and
record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

● Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
● Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing materials/equipment.
● Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the experiment.
● Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

● Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or programming
task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

● Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

● Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or quality of
program output.
4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

● Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
● Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the subject.
5. Record (5 Marks)

● Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER 5
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S5

MICROCONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

Course Code PCEOT501 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) NIL Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Provide a solid foundation in the principles, programming, and applications of the 8051
micro controller

2. Develop expertise in the architecture and programming of ARM processors

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction to Microprocessors and Microcontrollers-comparison of

microprocessors and microcontrollers-Introduction to Embedded Systems-
Application domain of embedded systems, features and characteristics, hard

1 and soft real time systems

8051-Microcontrollers Hardware: Microcontroller Architecture: IO Port 9

structure, Register organization, general purpose RAM, Bit Addressable
RAM, Special Function Registers (SFRs).

Assembly programming of 8051: Introduction to8051 assembly

programming, Data types and Assembler directives, 8051 Addressing
2 Modes, simple Assembly language programs(data transfer and arithmetic
operations only) 11

8051 programming in C: Data types and time delay in 8051, I/O

 programming in 8051

8051 Timer/Counter programming in embedded C: Programming 8051

timers, Counter programming,

8051 serial port programming in embedded C: Basics of serial

communication, 8051 connections to RS232, serial port programming in
8051.

8051 Interrupt programming in embedded C: 8051 interrupts, external

3 12
hardware and serial communication interrupt, Interrupt priority in 8051,
Interrupt programming in C.

Interfacing: LCD, ADC & DAC. Motor control: Relays and, stepper motor
interfacing, DC motor interfacing and PWM using 8051

Introduction to ARM processors –ARM core-ARM Microcontroller-RISC

vs CISC-Advanced features of ARM-Architecture versions-ARM
Architecture-Instruction set architecture, operating modes, register set,
4 12
General purpose registers- mode switching, conditional flags, Simple ALP
programs on Arithmetic & logical operation, addition, subtraction,
multiplication, division and factorial.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.
 Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks 60
 Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
(8x3 =24marks) divisions.

(4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Explain the general characteristics of embedded system and distinguish K2

CO1
hard and soft real time systems

CO2 Explain the architecture of a 8051 microcontroller K2

Develop assembly language and Embedded C program for 8051 K3

CO3
microcontroller.

Develop assembly language for interfacing of different peripheral K3

CO4
devices with 8051

CO5 Explain the architecture of an ARM processor K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3

CO2 3 2

CO3 3 2 3 2 2 2 1

CO4 3 2 2 2 2

CO5 3 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

The 8051 Microcontroller and 2nd

Muhammad Ali Maidu
1 Embedded Systems using Pearson Edition,
and Janice Gillespie
assembly and C 2007

Embedded Systems: An
2 Lyla B Das Pearson Education 2013
Integrated Approach,

3rd
Thomson /Cengage
3 The 8051 Microcontroller Kenneth J. Ayala Edition,20
Learning
07

Publisher: WP
Microcontroller: Architecture
4 Craig Steiner Publishers /
Assembly
Microsoft Press

5 ARM system-on-chip Steve Furber Addison Wesley

architecture
 Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

The 8051 Microcontroller

1 Manish K Patel McGraw Hill July 2017
Based Embedded Systems

Microcontrollers: Architecture,
January
2 Programming, Interfacing and Raj Kamal Pearson Education
2011
System Design

The 8051 microcontrollers,

K Uma Rao & Andhe January
3 architecture and programming Pearson
Pallavi 2010
and applications

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105102

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105102

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105102

4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105102
 SEMESTER S5

POWER ELECTRONICS
Course Code PCEOT502 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

PCEOT205,
Prerequisites (if any) PCEOT402 Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To give a strong foundation on power converters, power quality and electric drives
2. To enable the students to select suitable power devices and passive components for target
applications
3. To motivate students to design and implement power electronic converters having high
efficiency,
small size, high reliability and low cost

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Role of Power Electronics, Motivation, Objectives and Challenges, Power

Electronics Vs Linear Electronics, Ideal and real switches- Static and
dynamic Performance – Power losses- Temperature rise- Thermal Analogy-
Use of Heat sinks- Need for high efficiency, small size, high reliability and
1 low cost- Overview of Applications [2 Hrs] 11
Uncontrolled Switch: Power Diodes – Types- Characteristics (Static and
Dynamic) – Effects of Reverse Recovery Transient- Ratings- Schottky
Diodes-Features & Applications [2 Hrs]
Semi-controlled switch: SCR (Thyristor) – Symbol, Structure,
Characteristics (Static and dynamic) – Turn-on and Turn-off phenomena –
 Ratings- Gate control of SCR – Gate pulse magnitude and duration
requirements- Typical gate drive circuits – Gate synchronisation – Isolated
gate drives [3 Hrs]
Fully-controlled switches: MOSFETS and IGBTs: Symbol, Structure,
Characteristics (Static and dynamic) - Device ratings- Gate drive
requirements– Typical gate drive circuits [3 Hrs]
Modern power devices: Introduction to Wide Bandgap Devices – SiC
MOSFET and GaN HEMT – Features and advantages [1 Hr]
4. Power Electronics- Essentials and Applications by L. Umanand, John
Wiley, 2009
Controlled Rectifiers (Single Phase) – Fully controlled and half-controlled
rectifiers (semi-converter) with RL and RLE loads- Rectifier and inverter
modes of operation- waveforms (continuous & discontinuous conduction)–
Output voltage, Input line current, Real Power, Power factor and THD
(Continuous conduction, ripple free current) - Effect of source inductance
(Full converter in continuous conduction, ripple free current) [5 Hrs]
Controlled Rectifiers (3-Phase) - Fully controlled & Half-controlled bridge
2 12
converter with RLE load (continuous conduction, ripple free current)–
Waveforms- Output voltage equation [3 Hrs]
DC-DC Switching Regulators- Buck, Boost & Buck-Boost– Operation with
Continuous conduction Waveforms– Effect of non-idealities such as
capacitor ESR and inductor resistance (qualitative treatment only)- Design of
filter inductance and capacitance- Selection of power devices
[4 Hrs]
AC voltage controllers (ACVC) – 1-phase full-wave ACVC with R & RL
loads – waveforms – RMS output voltage - applications [1
Hr]
Switch mode DC-AC Voltage Source Inverters (VSI)- Single phase Half-
Bridge and Full-Bridge configurations- Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM) - Control of Fundamental output voltage- Harmonic spectrum-
3 Bipolar and Unipolar PWM- Linear, Over Modulation and Square wave 10
modes -Merits and demerits- Need for blanking time (dead-time)
[4 Hrs]
Three-Phase Pulse Width Modulated VSI - Fundamental Output voltage-
Linear, Over Modulation and Square wave modes – Third harmonic
Injection PWM [3 Hrs]
Single phase IGBT based current source Inverter(CSI)- Comparison
 between VSI and CSI [1
Hr]
Need for improved utility interface- Generation of current harmonics- Power
factor- Harmonics and IEEE 519 standard- Active shaping of the input line
current [1 Hr]
Introduction to Electric Drives– Advantages of adjustable speed electric
drives – Block diagram, Types of loads – Classification of load torque-
Motor torque-load combination: characteristics and dynamic equation-
Steady state stability [3 Hrs]
DC Drives- Chopper control of Separately Excited DC drives (SEDC) –One
quadrant, Two quadrant and four quadrant Chopper fed drives (Continuous
conduction only)- Motoring and Regenerative braking – Speed-Torque
characteristics – Speed control- Controlled rectifier fed separately excited
DC motor drive- Single phase and three phase (Continuous conduction
4 11
only)- Speed-Torque characteristics- Speed control – Dual converter drives
(single phase) - Circulating current Type and Non-circulating current - Static
four-quadrant operation with SEDC
[5Hrs]
Three-phase VSI fed induction motor drives: Stator Voltage control - V/F
speed control– Speed-Torque characteristics- Speed control – operation
below and above base speed –
Braking: dynamic and regenerative [3 Hrs]

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Understand the operation of modern power semiconductor devices, its K5
CO1
characteristics and Select suitable gate driver circuits & heatsinks
Understand the features of phase-controlled rectifiers, AC voltage K4
CO2
Controllers & Switching Regulators and Analyse the operation
Understand the features of different types of switch mode DC-AC K3
CO3
Inverters and Analyse the operation
Understand the need for improved efficiency, improved reliability, K3
CO4
improved load & source waveforms and improved utility interface
Understand the features of adjustable speed drives and Analyse the K4
CO5
basic drive schemes for DC motors and Induction Motors
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3
CO2 3 1 3
CO3 3 1 3
CO4 3 1 3
CO5 3 1 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Power Electronics- Converters,
Applications and Design, Ned Mohan, Undeland,
1 3ed(Indian Adaptation) by Robbins Wiley-India 2022
Mohan, Undeland, Robbins,
Wiley India, 2022
Power Electronics- Principles Joseph Vithayathil Tata Mcgraw Hill
2 2010
and Applications
3 Power Electronics Cyril W Lander McGrawHill 1993
Power Electronics – Circuits, Muhammad H. Rashid Pearson Education
4 2014
Devices and Applications
5 Power Electronics D.W. Hart McGrawHill 2010
Power Electronics – Essentials L. Umanand Wiley-India
6 2009
& Applications
Fundamentals of Electric G K Dubey Narosa
7 2001
Drives
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Elements of Power Electronics Philip T Krein Oxford 2017
Power Electronics Handbook-
2 Muhammad H. Rashid Butterworth 2024
5e

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
Lecture Series on Power Electronics by Prof. G. Bhuvaneswari, IIT Delhi
1 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z2CORFayCv0&list=PLp6ek2hDcoND7i5-
DAD9mPmYF1Wg6ROdO&index=3
NPTEL Lecture Series on Power Electronics by Prof. L. Umanand, IISc Bangalore
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eLIdqiPMjBs&list=PLgMDNELGJ1CaXa4sX6QSrkhu-
yP_Wu2EN&index=26
NPTEL Lecture Series by Prof. Shabari Nath, IIT Guwahati
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S_UXW2UzAi8&list=PLwdnzlV3ogoWVgA9fHBV36L_
bxWZlpa7X&index=7
 SEMESTER S5

POWER SYSTEMS
Course Code PCEOT503 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week 3:1:0:0
ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) GYEST104 Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To deliver fundamental concepts in power system components.

2. To deliver basic idea of power generation, transmission and protection.
3. To deliver fundamental concepts of protection in power system.
4. To deliver fundamental concepts of steady state and transient analysis in power
system.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Generation from renewable and non-renewable sources –
Hydro, thermal, nuclear- (block schematic details, environmental and
ethical factors, advantages, disadvantages)
Solar and wind - (block schematic details, environmental factors, 11
1 regulations, advantages, disadvantages)
Energy storage systems as alternative energy sources – BESS, CESS,
thermal SS
Load curve – Load duration curve, Load factor, diversity factor, demand
factor, Plant capacity factor, plant use factor - Numerical Problems.
Power Transmission System - (Electrical Model) - Line parameters –
resistance - inductance and capacitance (Derivation of three phase double
2
circuit)
11
Transmission line modelling - classifications (concept only) – transmission
 line as two port network – derivation and calculation of ABCD parameters
(derivation and numerical problems)
Skin Effect & Ferranti Effect – Corona (qualitative study only) – Surge
Impedance Loading
Insulators – string efficiency – grading (numerical problems)
Per unit quantities-single phase and three phase
Symmetrical components - sequence networks
Types of faults – Fault calculations(shunt only)-symmetrical and
unsymmetrical
Need for protection- Types of protection schemes – primary and back-up 11

Protective relays – Basics of typical electromechanical relay – induction

type only - Static (block diagrams of over current and instantaneous over
3 current relays)
Microprocessor (block diagram and flow chart of overcurrent relay) –
Fundamentals of Numerical relay
Principles of overcurrent, directional, distance and differential
Circuit breakers – operating principle – arc phenomenon – arc extinction –
principle & methods
Circuit breaker classification based on medium of arc extinction – SF6 &
VCB
Load flow studies – Introduction- Types of buses - Network model -
admittance matrix-
Gauss Siedal method of load flow analysis (Qualitative analysis)–
(numerical problems not required)
4 11
Power system stability - steady state, dynamic and transient stability
power angle curve - steady state stability limit - swing equation
Equal area criterion and application - methods of improving stability
limits
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Learn different types of power generating systems and schedule K2
CO1
generation appropriate for a given area.
CO2 Understand the electrical performance of any transmission line. K2
CO3 Demonstrate the working of switchgear for protection schemes. K2
Analyse the voltage profile of any given power system network using K3
CO4
iterative methods.
Analyse the steady state and transient stability of power system K3
CO5
networks.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 1 2 1 1
CO2 3 3 1
CO3 3 1 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 2 1 1
CO5 3 3 2 1 1
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
8 edition
th

1 Electrical Power Systems Wadhwa C. L. New Age International

2023

4 edition
th

V. K. Mehta and Rohit

2 Principles of Power System S.Chand reprint
Mehta
2020
Power System Protection and Badri Ram and D. N. 2 edition,
nd

3 Tata McGraw Hill

Switchgear Viswakarma 2011

Non-conventional energy 3 edition,

rd

4 B. H. Khan Tata McGraw Hill

sources 2017
Power System Analysis Hadi Saadat McGraw Hill 2 edition,
nd

5
2002.
Modern Power System D. P. Kothari and I. J. McGraw Hill 2 edition,
nd

6
Analysis Nagrath 2002.
Power System Analysis and Gupta B. R., S. Chand 2006
7
Design
 SEMESTER S5

DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Course Code PBEOT504 CIE Marks 60

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Understand the Fundamentals of Database Systems

2. Develop Proficiency in ER Modelling and Relational Databases
3. Master SQL for Database Manipulation and Querying
4. Identify and address anomalies in relational database design through
normalization
5. Comprehend the principles of transaction processing
6. Explore the characteristics and applications of NoSQL databases
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Concept & Overview of Database Management Systems (DBMS) -

Characteristics of Database
system, Structured, semi-structured and unstructured data. Data Models and
Schema - Three Schema architecture. Database Languages.
ER model - Basic concepts, entity set & attributes, notations, Relationships
1 and constraints, cardinality, participation, notations, weak entities,
relationships of degree 3. 9
Physical Data Organization - Review of terms: physical and logical records,
blocking factor, pinned and unpinned organization. Heap files, Indexing,
Singe level indices, numerical examples, Multi-level-indices, numerical
examples
 Structure of Relational Databases - Integrity Constraints, Synthesizing ER
diagram to relational schema
Structured Query Language (SQL), Data Definition Language (DDL), Table
definitions and operations – CREATE, DROP, ALTER, INSERT, DELETE,
2
UPDATE.SQL DML (Data Manipulation Language) - SQL queries on single
9
and multiple tables, Nested queries (correlated and non-correlated),
Aggregation and grouping, Views, assertions, Triggers, SQL data types,
Recursive queries, Accessing SQL from a Programming Language

Different anomalies in designing a database, The idea of normalization,

Functional dependency, Armstrong’s Axioms (proofs not required), Closures
and their computation, Equivalence of Functional Dependencies (FD),
Minimal Cover (proofs not required). First Normal Form (1NF), Second
3 9
Normal Form (2NF), Third Normal Form (3NF), Boyce Codd Normal Form
(BCNF), Lossless join and dependency preserving decomposition,
Algorithms for checking Lossless Join (LJ) and Dependency Preserving (DP)
properties

Transaction Processing Concepts - overview of concurrency control,

Transaction Model, Significance of concurrency Control & Recovery,
Transaction States, System Log, Desirable
Properties of transactions. Serial schedules, Concurrent and Serializable
Schedules, Conflict equivalence and conflict
serializability, Recoverable and cascade-less schedules, Locking, Two-
4
phase locking, and its variations. Log-based recovery, Deferred database
9
modification, check-pointing.
Introduction to NoSQL Databases, Main characteristics of Key-value DB
(examples from Redis), Document DB (examples from MongoDB) Main
characteristics of Column-Family DB (examples from Cassandra), and
Graph DB (examples from ArangoDB)
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
module. which 1 question should be answered. Each question
 Total of 8 Questions, can have a maximum of 2 sub divisions. Each question 40
each carrying 2 marks carries 6 marks.
(8x2 =16 marks) (4x6 = 24 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Summarize the characteristics of database systems and explain the K2

CO1
purpose of a database index
Model a database based on any mini-world description, using an ER K3
CO2
diagram and map it to a relational database schema
Frame SQL queries for relational database implementation, data K3
CO3
organization, manipulation, and retrieval requirements
Normalize a relational schema to an appropriate normal form and K3
CO4
analyze the decomposition for quality
Compare the different methods for concurrency control and recovery in K2
CO5
databases, and Identify the applications of NoSQL databases
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 2 3 3
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Fundamentals of Database 7th Edition,
1 Elmasri, Navathe Pearson
Systems 2017

Silberschatz, Korth, 7th Edition,

2 Database System Concepts Mc Graw Hill
Sudarshan 2020

Reference Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
1st Edition,
1 NoSQL for Mere Mortals
Dan Sullivan Addison Wesley
2015

1st Edition,
2 NoSQL for Dummies Adam Fowler Wiley (For Dummies)
2015

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No. Link ID

1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs91/preview

2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs91/preview

3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs91/preview

4 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc22_cs91/preview
 PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation

Simulation/
Presentation
Laboratory
Lecture delivery Project identification (Progress and Final
Work/
Presentations)
Workshops
Group
Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
discussion
Question Project Milestone Reviews,
answer Analytical thinking
Feedback,
Sessions/ and Testing
Project reformation (If
Brainstorming self-learning
Sessions
required)

Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Sl. No Evaluation for Allotted

Marks

1 Project Planning and Proposal 5

2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer 4

Sessions

3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3

4 Execution and Implementation 10

5 Final Presentations 5

6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3

Total 30
 1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

 Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

 Research and background understanding
 Defined objectives and methodology

2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

 Individual contribution to the presentation

 Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

 Active participation and individual contribution

 Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

 Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

 Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
 Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

 Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

 Individual contribution to the presentation
 Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

 Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

 Innovation and originality in the project

Creativity in solutions and approaches

 SEMESTER S5

ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS

Course Code PEEET521 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week 3:0:0:0
ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) NIL Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the importance and application of energy storage systems.

2. To familiarize with different energy storage technologies.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Need and role of energy storage systems in power system, General
considerations, Energy and power balance in a storage unit,
Mathematical model of storage system: modelling of power
transformation system (PTS)-Central store (CS) and charge–discharge 9
1
control system (CDCS), Econometric model of storage system.
Thermal energy: General considerations -Storage media-
Containment- Thermal energy storage in a power plant, Potential
energy: Pumped hydro-Compressed Air.
Kinetic energy: Mechanical- Flywheel, Power to Gas: Hydrogen-
Synthetic methane. Electro chemical energy: Batteries-Battery
parameters: C-rating– SoC – DoD -Specific Energy- Specific power
2 (numerical examples), Fuel cells, Electrostatic energy (Super 9
Capacitors), Electromagnetic energy (Superconducting Magnetic
Energy Storage), Comparative analysis, Environmental impacts of
different technologies.
Types of renewable energy sources: Wave - Wind – Tidal –
3
Hydroelectric - Solar thermal technologies and Photovoltaics, Storage
 role in isolated power systems with renewable powersources, Storage 9
role in an integrated power system with grid-connected
renewablepowersources.
Smart grid, Smart micro grid, Smart house, Mobile storage system:
Electric vehicles – Grid to Vehicle (G2V)-Vehicle to Grid (V2G),
Management and control hierarchy of storage systems. 9
4 Aggregating energy storage systems and distributed generation
(Virtual Power Plant Energy Management with storage systems),
Battery SCADA, Hybrid energy storage systems: configurations and
applications.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Identify the role of energy storage in power systems. K3

Classify thermal, kinetic and potential energy storage systems K3

CO2
and their applications.
Compare electrochemical, electrostatic and electromagnetic K3
CO3
storage technologies.
Illustrate energy storage technology in renewable energy K2
CO4
integration.
Summarise energy storage technology applications for smart K2
CO5
grids.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 1 1
CO3 3 1 1
CO4 3 1 1
CO5 3 1 1
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
The Institution of
Second
Energy Storage for Power Engineering and
1 A.G.Ter- Gazarian Edition,
Systems Technology (IET)
2011
Publication, UK,
Francisco Díaz-
Energy Storage in Power
González, Andreas
2 Systems Wiley Publication 2016.
Sumper, Oriol Gomis-
Bellmunt

Reference Books
Name of the Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher Year
Electricity Energy Electric
Technica
Storage Technology Power
l Update,
1 Options: A White Paper D. Rastler Research
Decembe
Primer on Applications, Institute
r 2010
Costs, and Benefits (USA)
National
Paul Denholm,
The Role of Energy Renewable
Erik Ela, Brendan January
2 Storage with Renewable Energy
Kirby and Michael 2010
Electricity Generation Laboratory
Milligan
(NREL)
Electrical energy
management of virtual
power plants in IEEE Power
P. Nezamabadi and
3 distribution networks Distribution 2011
G. B. Gharehpetian
with renewable energy Conferenc
resources and energy
storage systems
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o6Afp-
1 MI_tQ&list=PLLy_2iUCG87AjWoOk0A3y4hpGQVTdtl6G&index=12 (NPTEL lecture IIT
Roorkee)
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yar51GJVqgg (NPTEL lecture IIT Guwahati)
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=frWxC5KL8kE (NPTEL lecture IIT Guwahati)
4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AZIS_MCw8Qc (NPTEL lecture IIT Kanpur)
 SEMESTER S5

ELECTRIC VEHICLES

Course Code PEEET522 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week (L:
2:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
T:P: R)
Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
PCEET303, PCEET304
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
PCEET403

Course Objectives:

1. Familiarise the various characteristics of conventional vehicles and compare them with
electric vehicles
2. Analyse the various drive train topologies for electric vehicles
3. Discuss the propulsion unit for electric vehicles
4. Analyse the various energy storage systems and energy management strategies
5. Selection of drive systems and study of various communication protocols for EV
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Conventional Vehicles: Basics of vehicle performance, Vehicle power
source characterization, Transmission characteristics (1hr).
Introduction to Electric Vehicles: History of electric vehicles,
Classification of electric vehicles. Overview of EV challenges. Overview of
EV technologies- motor drive technology , energy source technology ,
battery charging technology , vehicle-to-grid technology(2hr)
1 Vehicle Dynamics & Load Forces: Mathematical models to describe
9
vehicle performance, vehicle load forces: aerodynamic drag, rolling
resistance, grading resistance, vehicle acceleration, Calculation of motor
power from traction torque, Numerical problems. (4 hrs)
Electric Drive-trains: Basic concept of electric traction, Introduction to
various electric drive-train topologies, Power flow control in electric drive-
train topologies, Fuel efficiency analysis.(2 hrs)

2 DC Drives: Motoring using a PM DC Machine - DC motor electric drive

 using DC-DC converter - Generating/Braking using a PM DC Machine. 9
(3hrs)
PMSM Drives: Review of PMSM motor basics – Independent control of
orthogonal flux and torque (concept only) - Field Oriented Control (FOC) –
Sensored and sensorless control (block diagram only). (4hrs)
Sizing the drive system: Matching the electric machine and the Internal
Combustion Engine (ICE) , Sizing the propulsion motor, Sizing the power
electronics-Switch technology selection, Ripple capacitor design, Switching
frequency and PWM. (2hrs)
Battery based energy storage systems: Types of battery- battery
parameters-units of battery energy storage - capacity rate, - cell voltage -
specific energy - cycle life - self-discharge- static battery equivalent circuit
model - series-parallel battery pack equivalent circuits.(3hrs)
Other storage topologies: Fuel Cell based energy storage systems-
Supercapacitors- Flywheel- Hybridization of different energy storage
3 9
devices. (2 hrs)
Sizing considerations of battery -Time and charge/discharge cycles -
Lifetime – Beginning of life (BOL) - End of life (EOL) - DOD - Efficiency
of Battery Pack - Determination of pack Voltage, range for EV -
Determination of Cell/Pack Voltage for a Given Output\Input Power. Battery
management system, Numerical problems.(4hrs)
Overview of Electric Vehicle Battery Chargers–Types of chargers-On-
board chargers, Off- board chargers, Wireless charger. Electric Vehicle
Supply Equipment (EVSE) - Grid to EVSE to On-board chargers to battery
pack power flow block schematic diagrams – V2G concept(3hrs)
Types of charging stations - AC Level 1 & 2, DC - Level 3 -Types of
Connectors - CHAdeMO, CCS Type1 and 2, GB/T - PIN diagrams and
differences (2hrs)
4
Autonomous Vehicles: Levels of automation, significance, functional 9
architecture-sensors, actuators, path planning & effects of automation in
vehicles (2 hrs)
Vehicle Communication protocols : Need & requirements - Functions of
Control Pilot (CP) and Proximity Pilot (PP) pins, Communication Protocols -
CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY (Basics only)- Power line communication (PLC) in
EV (2 hrs)
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Familiarise the performance of conventional vehicles and electric K2
CO1
vehicles
CO2 Analyse the various drive train topologies for electric vehicles K3
Discuss the propulsion unit for electric vehicles and selection of K3
CO3
drive systems
Analyse the various energy storage systems and energy K3
CO4
management strategies
Study of chargers, charging stations and various communication K2
CO5
protocols for EV
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3
CO5 3 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Electric Vehicles Machines K. T. Chau John Wiley
1 and Drives- Design, Analysis 2015
and Application
Propulsion Systems for John M. Miller The Institution of
Hybrid Vehicles Engineering and
2 Technology, 2010
London, United
Kingdom
Hybrid Electric Vehicles – Chris Mi, M A Wiley
Principles and Masrur, D W Gao
3 2011
applications with practical
perspectives

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Modern Electric, Hybrid
Mehrdad Ehsani,
and Fuel Cell Vehicles:
1 Yimi Gao, Sebastian CRC Press
Fundamentals, Theory and
E. Gay
Design
Permanent Magnet
2 Synchronous and Brushless R. Krishnan CRC Press
DC Motors Drives
Electric and Hybrid Iqbal Hussein CRC Press
3 Vehicles: Design 2003
Fundamentals
 SEMESTER S5

DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN

Course Code PEEET523 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3-0-0-0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To acquire knowledge about Asynchronous and clocked Synchronous sequential circuit

design.
2. To detect the faults and hazards in digital circuit design
3. To design and implement digital circuits using VHDL.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Clocked Synchronous Networks, Analysis of Clocked Synchronous

1 Sequential Networks (CSSN), Modeling of CSSN, State assignment 10

and reduction, Design of CSSN.

ASM Chart and its realization.

Asynchronous Sequential Circuits, Analysis of Asynchronous 10

2
Sequential Circuits (ASC), Flow table reduction, Races in ASC, State
assignment problem and the transition table.

Hazards – static and dynamic hazards in combinational networks,

Essential Hazards, Design of Hazard free circuits, Data 8
3
synchronizers, Mixed operating mode asynchronous circuits,
Practical issues- clock skew and jitter, Synchronous and
 asynchronous inputs.

Faults: Fault table method – path sensitization method – Boolean

difference method.

VLSI Design flow: Design entry: Schematic, Data types and objects,
different modelling styles in VHDL - Dataflow, Behavioural and
4 Structural Modelling. 8

VHDL constructs and codes for combinational and sequential circuits.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Analyze asynchronous and clocked synchronous sequential K3
CO1
circuits
CO2 Design hazard-free digital circuits K3
CO3 Identify faults in digital circuits K3
CO4 Apply VHDL programming in digital system design K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Digital Principles & Design Donald G Givone Tata McGraw Hill 1/e 2002

Digital Design with an

M.Morris Mano and
2 introduction to HDL, VHDL Pearson education 6/e, 2018
Michel.D.Ciletti
and Verilog

3 Digital Design John F Wakerly Pearson Education 4/e 2008

Digital Logic Applications

4 John M Yarbrough Cengage India 1/e 2006
and Design
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Miron Abramovici,
Digital Systems Testing and John Wiley & Sons
1 Melvin A. Breuer and
Testable Design Inc
Arthur D. Friedman

2 Logic Design Theory N. N. Biswas PHI

Introduction to Digital
Richard E. Haskell,
3 Design Using Digilent LBE Books- LLC
Darrin M. Hanna
FPGA Boards

Digital Circuits and Logic

4 Samuel C. Lee PHI
Design

Digital System Design Using Khanna Book

5 R. Anand
VHDL Publishing Company

Digital System Design using

6 Charles Roth TMH
VHDL
 SEMESTER S5

SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

Course Code PEEET524 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Provides fundamental knowledge in the Software Development Process which covers Software
Development, and Project Management concepts.
2. Enables the learners to apply state of the art industry practices in Software development.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Software Engineering: Introduction to Software
Engineering - Professional software development, Software engineering
ethics. Software process models - The waterfall model, Incremental
development. Process activities - Software specification, Software design
and implementation, Software validation, Software evolution. Coping with
1 8
change - Prototyping, Incremental delivery, Boehm's Spiral Model. Agile
software development - Agile methods, agile manifesto - values and
principles. Agile development techniques, Agile Project Management. Case
studies : An insulin pump control system. Mentcare - a patient information
system for mental health care.
Requirement Analysis and Design: Functional and non-functional
requirements, Requirements engineering processes. Requirements
2 elicitation, Requirements validation, Requirements change, Traceability 10
Matrix. Developing use cases, Software Requirements Specification
Template, Personas, Scenarios, User stories, Feature identification. Design
 concepts - Design within the context of software engineering, Design
Process, Design concepts, Design Model. Architectural Design - Software
Architecture, Architectural Styles, Architectural considerations,
Architectural Design Component level design - What is a component?,
Designing Class-Based Components, Conducting Component level design,
Component level design for web-apps.
Implementation and Testing (12 hours)
Object-oriented design using the UML, Design patterns, Implementation
issues, Open-source development - Open-source licensing - GPL, LGPL,
BSD. Review Techniques - Cost impact of Software Defects, Code review
and statistical analysis. Informal Review, Formal Technical Reviews, Post-
mortem evaluations. Software testing strategies - Unit Testing, Integration
3 12
Testing, Validation testing, System testing, Debugging, White box testing,
Path testing, Control Structure testing, Black box testing, Testing
Documentation and Help facilities. Test automation, Test-driven
development, Security testing. Overview of DevOps and Code Management
- Code management, DevOps automation, CI/CD/CD. Software Evolution -
Evolution processes, Software maintenance.
Software Project Management:Software Project Management - Risk
management, Managing people, Teamwork. Project Planning, Software
pricing, Plan-driven development, Project scheduling, Agile planning.
4 Estimation techniques, COCOMO cost modeling. Configuration 8
management, Version management, System building, Change management,
Release management, Agile software management - SCRUM framework.
Kanban methodology and lean approaches.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Interpret software process models and core activities, including
CO1 handling changes with techniques like prototyping and incremental K2
delivery.
CO2 Describe agile methods, including the Agile Manifesto and agile K2
project management practices.
CO3 Prepare Software Requirement Specification and Software Design for a K3
given problem
Interpret object-oriented design principles, design patterns, software
CO4 testing methods (including unit testing, integration testing, and test K2
automation), and open-source licensing models (such as GPL, LGPL,
and BSD).
Describe software review techniques, DevOps practices and code
CO5 management principles, and software evolution processes and K2
maintenance strategies.
Make use of software project management concepts while planning,
CO6 K2
estimation, scheduling, tracking and change management of a project,
with proper application of SCRUM, Kanban and Lean frameworks.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 3

CO6 3 3 3 3 3

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Tenth

1 Software Engineering Ian Sommerville Pearson Education edition,

2015

Software Engineering : A Eighth

2 McGraw Hill
practitioner’s approach Roger S. Pressman edition,
publication
2014

Engineering Software Products: First

3 An Introduction to Modern Pearson Education Edition,
Ian Sommerville
Software Engineering 2020

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

2010
1
Kanban David J. Anderson Blue Hole Press

Agile Management for 2003

2 David J. Anderson Pearson
Software Engineering

Software Project Management 1998

3 Walker Royce
Pearson Education
: A unified framework
Implementing Lean Software Addison-Wesley
Mary Poppendieck 2006
4 Development: From Concept Signature Series
to Cash
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.

1 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105182

2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105182

3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105182

4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105218
 SEMESTER S5

MODERN OPERATING SYSTEMS

Course Code PEEOT521 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PEEET526 Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1.To understand the overall working of computer system, tradeoffs between performance and
functionality and the division of jobs between hardware and software.
2.Introduces the concepts of memory management, device management, process management, file
management and security & protection mechanisms available in an operating system.
3.To understand the fundamentals about any operating system design
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction: Operating system overview – Functions, Boot Process
Processes - Process states, Process control block, threads, scheduling,
1 Operations on processes - process creation and termination
Inter-process communication - shared memory systems, Message passing 8
systems.
Process Scheduling – Basic concepts- Scheduling criteria -scheduling
algorithms- First come First Served, Shortest Job Firs, Priority scheduling,
Round robin scheduling
2 Process synchronization- Race conditions – Critical section problem –
Peterson’s solution, Synchronization hardware, Mutex Locks, 10
Semaphores, Monitors – Synchronization problems - Producer Consumer,
Dining Philosophers and Readers-Writers.
Deadlocks: Necessary conditions, Resource allocation graphs, Deadlock
3 prevention, Deadlock avoidance – Banker’s algorithms, Deadlock 10
detection, Recovery from deadlock.
 Memory Management: Concept of address spaces, Swapping, Contiguous
memory allocation, fixed and variable partitions, Segmentation, Paging.
Virtual memory, Demand paging, Page replacement algorithms.
File System: File concept - Attributes, Operations, types, structure – Access
methods, Protection. File-system implementation, Directory
4
implementation. Allocation methods. Storage Management: Magnetic 8
disks, Solid-state disks, Disk Structure, Disk scheduling, Disk formatting.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the relevance, structure and functions of Operating Systems in K2
CO1
computing devices.
Illustrate the concepts of process management and process scheduling K2
CO2
mechanisms employed in Operating Systems.
Explain process synchronization in Operating Systems and illustrate K2
CO3 process synchronization mechanisms using Mutex Locks, Semaphores
and Monitors
Explain any one method for detection, prevention, avoidance and K2
CO4
recovery for managing deadlocks in Operating Systems.
CO5 Explain the memory management algorithms in Operating Systems. K2

Explain the security aspects and algorithms for file and storage K2
CO6
management in Operating Systems.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 3 3 1 2
CO2 2 3 3 2 1 2
CO3 2 3 3 2 1 2
CO4 2 3 3 2 1 2
CO5 2 3 3 2 1 2
CO6 2 3 3 2 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Abraham Silberschatz, 9th
1 Operating System Concepts Peter Baer Galvin, Greg Wiley India. Edition,
Gagne 2015

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
6th
Pearson, Global
1 Modern Operating Systems Andrew S Tanenbaum Edition,
Edition
2015.
Garry Nutt, Nabendu 3rd
2 Operating Systems Pearson Education
Chaki, Sarmistha Neogy Edition,
2nd
3 Operating Systems D.M.Dhamdhere Tata McGraw Hill Edition,
2011.
Sibsankar Haldar, Alex
4 Operating Systems Pearson Education
A Aravind

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://youtu.be/jciGIvn7UfM?si=iTyzYC1tztsAS8F4

2 https://youtu.be/I_7rthka2Is?si=kRo68aA_ozTBrNno
 SEMESTER S5

INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

Course Code PEEOT522 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Engineering Math
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
Courses

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce time domain and frequency domain representation of continuous and discrete time
signals and perform various mathematical operations
2. To introduce various types of signals and systems
3. To introduce time domain and frequency domain representation of continuous and discrete time
systems.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Signals and Systems
Elementary Signals, Classification and representation of continuous time
and discrete time signals, Signal operations.
(3 hours)
Concept of system: Continuous time and discrete time systems;
1
Properties of systems: Time invariance, Linearity, Causality, Systems with
10
and without memory, Stability. (3 hours)
Convolution Integral and convolution sum (graphical and any one matrix
method) (3 hours)
Impulse and step response. (1 hour)
Frequency domain characterization of Signals and Systems:
2 Fourier transform: Existence - Properties of Continuous time Fourier
9
transform; Concept of Frequency response; Significance of Fourier
 transform and difference from Fourier series-Energy spectral density and
power spectral density (4 hours)
Characterization of LTI systems: Differential equation representation of
continuous time LTI systems. Transfer function representation of
differential equation in Laplace domain. (2 hours)
Modeling of LTI systems: Electrical and translational Mechanical system -
transfer function model (3 hours)
Sampled Data Systems and Z-Transform (9 hours):
Sampling process - Impulse train sampling-sampling theorem- Aliasing
effect. (2 hour)
Zero-order and First-order hold circuits - Signal reconstruction.
3 (2 hours) 9
Z-transform: Stability and causality conditions using ROC. Characterization
of difference equations using Z-transform.
Pulse transfer function. Impulse response of discrete-time systems. (5
hours)
Sampled Data System Representation and Fourier Analysis:
Delay operator and block diagram representation-
Direct form, cascade and parallel representations (3 hours)
4 Discrete Fourier series: Fourier representation of discrete time signals -
8
Discrete Fourier series– properties. (2 hours)
Discrete Time Fourier Transform: Properties- Frequency response of simple
DT systems. (3 hours)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
To represent continuous and discrete time signals in time domain and K2
CO1
perform various mathematical operations
CO2 To represent continuous time signals and systems in frequency domain K3
CO3 To represent discrete time signals and systems in Z-domain. K3

CO4 To represent discrete time signals and systems in frequency domain K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
2
CO4 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd
Simon Haykin, Barry
1 Signals and Systems Wiley Edition,
Van Veen
2007
2nd
2 Discrete Time Control Systems Katsuhiko Ogata Pearson Edition,
2006
5th
3 Control Systems Engineering Norman S. Nise Wiley Edition,
2009

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Oppenheim A.V., 2nd
Prentice
1 Signals and Systems Willsky A.S. & Nawab Edition,
Hall
S.H. 2015
12th
Dorf R. C., Pearson Education
2 Modern Control Systems Edition,
Bishop R. H India
2013
4th
Digital Signal Processing John G. Proakis &
3 Prentice Hall Edition,
Principles Dimitris G.Manolakis
2007
 SEMESTER: S5

POWER ELECTRONICS LAB

Course Code PCEOL507 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PCEOT402 Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1.To motivate students to design and implement power electronic converters having high efficiency,
small size, high reliability and low cost
2.To enable the students to select suitable power devices and passive components
3.To compare simulation results and hardware results and do iterative design

Experiments
(Minimum 10 experiments are mandatory)
Suggestions: Students are encouraged to do the simulations associated with the
experiments before the corresponding lab session so that more emphasis can be given to
Expt. the hardware part in the lab (Simulations can be done off-lab) and the simulation results
No. need to be correlated with the hardware results. For experiments where the effects of
device parasitics cannot be neglected and circuit-level simulations are needed, SPICE
based simulation software such as LTSpice , OrCAD , PSpice , Proteus etc. may be
TM TM TM TM

used. In other cases, software like MATLAB Simulink , SciLab , SEQUEL , PSIM ,
TM TM TM TM

PLECS TM
etc. may be used if required.

Preliminary work-1 (Mandatory)

(a) Testing and Troubleshooting- Power diodes, SCR, Power Transistors, MOSFETS,
IGBTS, OP-Amps, MOSFET drivers etc – Use of Multimeter, DSO, and Data sheets
(b) Simulation of any Power Electronic circuit using a SPICE based software such as
LTSpice, ORCAD, PSpice, and Proteus
 Static VI characteristics of Power Devices
1 Aim: To simulate the static VI characteristics of (a) Power Diode (b) SCR (b)
MOSFET (c) IGBT using any suitable simulation software and compare with
datasheet values
High frequency diode - Measurement of power loss and reverse recovery time
Aim: To measure the power losses & reverse recovery time of a high frequency diode,
2
compare with theoretical estimate and to compare with a schottky diode of similar
ratings (Hardware/Simulation).
Single-Phase half-wave-controlled rectifier feeding R/RL load
Aim: To simulate and set up a half-wave-controlled rectifier with line synchronized R
and RC firing circuits and plot relevant waveforms such as voltage waveform across
3
the load and thyristor, gate voltage and gate current for different firing angles. The
need for line synchronization to be emphasized. (Any suitable simulation software
may be used for the simulation)
Single-Phase half-controlled(semi-converter)/fully-controlled rectifier feeding R/RL
loads
Aim: To simulate and set up any type of line synchronized Triggering circuit such as UJT
4 firing, Ramp firing, Digital firing etc. for single-phase half-controlled/full controlled
rectifier feeding R and RL loads and observe relevant waveforms. The need for line
synchronization to be emphasized (Any suitable simulation software may be used for
the simulation).
Effect of source inductance in single-phase controlled rectifier feeding highly
inductive loads
Aim: To set up a single-phase full controlled rectifier with source inductance, for highly
5
inductive loads, observe relevant waveforms and calculate the source power factor, line
current THD and the average voltage lost due to the effect of source inductance
(Simulation may be used to get more insights).
Single-Phase half-controlled/fully-controlled Rectifier fed PMDC/Separately excited
DC motor drive
Aim: To simulate and set up a single-phase half-controlled/full controlled rectifier feeding
6
a PMDC/SEDC motor (additional inductor may be included in the armature circuit to get
continuous conduction) and observe relevant waveforms (Any suitable simulation
software may be used for the simulation)
AC Voltage controller feeding R/RL loads
7
Aim: To set up a single-phase AC voltage controller using TRIAC/SCR and to
 observe relevant waveforms such as voltage waveforms across the load (R/RL Load)
& TRIAC/SCR, gate voltage, gate current etc. for different firing angles (Simulation
may be used to get more insights).
Isolated Gate Driver Circuit for Single-phase half-Bridge IGBT/MOSFET
Inverter
Aim: (a) To identify the gate current and voltage requirement to drive the
MOSFET/IGBT in a half-bridge configuration for a certain switching frequency with
8 galvanic isolation, to select suitable industry-standard IGBT/MOSFET driver ICs and
to test the driver circuit both for floating and ground-referenced configurations, and to
observe relevant waveforms
(b) To simulate and set up a circuit for dead-time generation for use with the half-
bridge inverter
Gate drive using Bootstrap technique
Aim: To identify the gate current and voltage requirement to drive the
9 MOSFET/IGBT with boot-strap technique for a certain switching frequency,
understand the merits & pertinent limitations of the bootstrapping circuit and to
explore dead-time and shutdown/over current protection options
Single-phase half-bridge/full-bridge IGBT/MOSFET inverter feeding RL load
Aim: To simulate and set up a single-phase half-bridge inverter with L/LC filter for
10
square wave and sine-triangle PWM, observe relevant waveforms and obtain THD
(Any suitable simulation software may be used for the simulation)
Inductor design and Fabrication
Aim: To design and fabricate an inductor to be used in a high frequency switching
11 application and measure the inductance value using time constant measurement/LCR
meter
Note: The inductor may be designed taking into account the requirement in expt #12
Design and set-up a buck/ boost /buck-boost converter
(Mandatory Experiment)
Aim: (a) Design, simulate and set up a buck/boost/buck-boost converter (continuous
conduction mode) and observe relevant waveforms (b) Compare the measured
12 quantities such as capacitor voltage ripple and inductor current ripple with the
designed values (c) Calculate power loss in power devices and select heat sink (and
snubbers) needed if any (d) Overall efficiency computation and measurement of
temperature of the heatsink and passive components (e) Explore performance
improvement opportunities
 (Any suitable simulation software may be used for the simulation)
Speed control of Permanent Magnet/Separately-Excited DC motor using chopper
drive
13 Aim: To simulate and set up a One-quadrant/Two-quadrant DC chopper to control the
speed of a PMDC/SEDC motor for operation in continuous conduction and observe
relevant waveforms (Any suitable simulation software may be used for the simulation)
Three-phase IGBT/MOSFET inverter feeding RL Load
Aim: To simulate and set up (Demo is sufficient) a three-phase inverter for (a) sine-
triangle PWM (b) third-harmonic (or triple-n harmonic) injection PWM and observe
14 relevant waveforms & THD. Influence of various parameters such as switching
frequency, amplitude & frequency modulation indices, dead-time etc. on the
performance may be studied (Any suitable simulation software may be used for the
simulation).
Stator Voltage control of Three-Phase Induction Motor
Aim: To set up (Demo is sufficient) a three-phase induction motor drive using stator
15 voltage control and observe relevant waveforms & THD (Simulation may be used to
get more
insights).
Single phase unidirectional/bidirectional interface – boost PWM rectifier
Aim: To set up (Demo is sufficient) a single-phase PWM rectifier with near unity
16 power, observe relevant waveforms and obtain the line current THD/PF (Simulation
may be used to get more
insights).
V/F control of Three-Phase Induction Motor
Aim: To simulate and set up (Demo is sufficient) a three-phase induction motor drive
17
using V/F control and observe relevant waveforms & THD for different speeds of
operation (Any suitable simulation software may be used for the simulation).
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)

5 25 20 50

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

 Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only
upon submitting the duly certified record.
 Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Understand the operation of modern power semiconductor devices, its K5
CO1
characteristics and Design & Select suitable gate driver circuits & heatsinks
Understand the features of phase-controlled rectifiers, AC voltage Controllers K4
CO2
& Switching Regulators and Analyse the operation
Understand the features of different types of switch mode DC-AC Inverters K3
CO3
and Analyse the operation
Understand the need for improved efficiency, improved reliability, improved K3
CO4
load & source waveforms and improved utility interface
Understand the features of adjustable speed drives and Analyse the basic K4
CO5
drive schemes for DC motors and Induction Motors
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3
CO2 3 1 3
CO3 3 1 3
CO4 3 1 3
CO5 3 1 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Power Electronics- Essentials
1 L. Umanand John Wiley 2009
and Applications
Power Electronic Systems-
2 Jai P Agrawal Pearson 2006
Theory and Design
Power Electronics- Converters,
Ned Mohan, Undeland,
3 Applications and Design, 3e Wiley India 2022
Robbins
(Indian Adaptation)
Power electronics: principles
4 Joseph Vithayathil Tata McGraw Hill 2010
and applications
5 Power Electronics D.W. Hart McGraw Hill 2010

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Elements of Power Electronics Philip T Krein Oxford 2017
Power Electronics- Devices,
2 Muhammad H. Rashid, Pearson 2014
Circuits and Applications
3 Power Electronics Cyril W Lander McGrawHill 1993
Power Electronics- A first
Ned Mohan, Siddharth
4 course: Simulations and Wiley 2023
Raju
Laboratory Implementations
Power Electronics Step by
5 Step- Design, Modeling, Weidong Xiao McGrawHill 2021
Simulation and Control
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
Lecture Series on Power Electronics by Prof. G. Bhuvaneswari, IIT Delhi
1 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z2CORFayCv0&list=PLp6ek2hDcoND7i5-
DAD9mPmYF1Wg6ROdO&index=3
NPTEL Lecture Series on Power Electronics by Prof. L. Umanand, IISc Bangalore
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eLIdqiPMjBs&list=PLgMDNELGJ1CaXa4sX6QSrkhu-
yP_Wu2EN&index=26
NPTEL Lecture Series by Prof. Shabari Nath, IIT Guwahati
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=S_UXW2UzAi8&list=PLwdnzlV3ogoWVgA9fHBV36L_
bxWZlpa7X&index=7

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

 Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test

understanding of the upcoming experiment.
 Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and
understanding of the theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

 Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution

of experiments, and following safety protocols.
 Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations,
and troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
 Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

 Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper

documentation of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
 Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough
record and maintaining a well-organized fair record.
 4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

 Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying

principles during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

 Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure

and understanding each step involved.
 Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
 Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to
the experiment.
 Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

 Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

 Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

 Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment
or quality of program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

 Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related

questions
  Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of
the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

 Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER S5

MICROCONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LAB

Course Code PCEOL508 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) Nil Course Type Lab

Course Objectives:

1. Achieve proficiency in 8051 microcontroller assembly language and

embedded C programming.
2. Acquire practical experience with Arduino.
Expt.
Experiments
No.
ALP programming for
(a) Data transfer: Block data movement, exchanging data, sorting, finding largest element
1 in an array.
(b)Arithmetic operations: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication and Division. Comparing
square and cube of 16 bit numbers.

2 ALP programming for the implementation of counters: Hex up and down counters, BCD
up/down counters.

(a)ALP programming for implementing Boolean and logical instructions: bit

manipulation.
3
(b)ALP programming for implementing conditional call and return instructions: Toggle
the bits of port 1 by sending the values of 55H and AAH continuously, Factorial of a
number.

4 ALP program for Generation of delay.

5 C program for stepper motor control.

6 C program for DC motor direction and speed control using PWM.

 7 C program for alphanumerical LCD panel/keyboard interface.

8 C program for ADC interfacing.

Demo experiment using 8051 Microcontroller programming.

9 ALP programming for implementation code conversion- BCD to ASCII , ASCII to BCD,
ASCII to Decimal , Decimal to ASCII, Hexadecimal to Decimal and Decimal to
Hexadecimal

a)Familiarization of Aurdino IDE.

10
b)LED blinking with different ON/OFF delay timings with (i) inbuilt LED (ii) externally
interfaced LED.

Arduino based voltage measurement of 12 V solar PV module /12 V battery and

11
displaying the measured value using 12C LCD display..
Demo experiments on Arduino / Raspberry Pi to upload /retrieve temperature and
12
humidity data to thing speak cloud.
Arduino based DC current measurement using Hall effect current sensor displaying the
13
value using 12C LCD module.
14 Directional control of the DC motor using Arduino.
15 Interfacing of the relay with Arduino.
16 Building intrusion detection system with Arduino and Ultrasonic sensor.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work experiments,

Viva and Timely Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination
(Continuous Assessment)

5 25 20 50
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Conduct of experiment/ Result with valid

Preparatory Execution of work/ inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Algorithm Programming Output
10 15 10 10 5 50

 Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only
upon submitting the duly certified record.
 Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Develop and execute ALP programs for solving arithmetic and logical K3
CO1
problems using microcontroller
CO2 Develop embedded C programming using instruction sets of 8051 K3
CO3 Examine circuits for interfacing processor with various peripheral devices K4
Design a microcontroller based system with the help of various interfacing K6
CO4
devices
CO5 Design an Arduino based system with the help of various interfacing devices K6

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3
1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 The 8051 microcontroller Kenneth Ayala Cengage Learning
Microprocessors and
2 R. LylaB.Das Pearson Education
Microcontrollers

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
I. Scott Mac Kenzie,
1 The 8051 Microcontroller
Raphael C.-W. Phan
The 8051 microcontroller Muhammad Ali
2 Pearson Education
and embedded systems Mazidi
Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

 Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test

understanding of the upcoming experiment.
 Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and
understanding of the theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

 Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution

of experiments, and following safety protocols.
 Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations,
and troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
 Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

 Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper

documentation of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
 Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough
record and maintaining a well-organized fair record.

4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

 Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying

principles during a viva voce session.

Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

 Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure

and understanding each step involved.
  Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
 Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to
the experiment.
 Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.

2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

 Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

 Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

 Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment
or quality of program output.

4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

 Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related

questions
 Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of
the subject.

5. Record (5 Marks)

 Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab record submitted

 SEMESTER S6
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S6

LINEAR CONTROL SYSTEMS

Course Code PCEOT601 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:1:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
Exam
Credits 4 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
Hours
Course
Prerequisites (if any) Core Math Courses Theory
Type

Course Objectives:

1.To introduce various classical tools for analysis of linear control system in time and frequency
domain.
2.To provide a fundamental knowledge of modern control system.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Control Systems, mathematical modelling and Transfer
function Based Analysis

Open loop and Closed loop control systems; Automatic control systems;
Necessity and significance. (1 hour)

Modelling of LTI systems: LTI Systems, Transfer function representation

1
of differential equation in Laplace domain.
Electrical, translational and rotational mechanical systems, DC servo- 9
motor modelling. (4 hours).

Block diagram representation - block diagram reduction. Signal flow graph

- Mason's gain formula. (4 hours)

Performance Analysis of Control Systems:

Time domain analysis of control systems: Impulse and Step responses of

first and second order systems - Pole dominance for higher order systems.
Time domain specifications. Steady state error analysis and static error
2
constants (5 hours)
13
Characteristic equation. Routh stability criterion. (3 hours)

Root locus technique: Construction of Root locus - stability analysis-

 effect of addition of poles and zeros; Effect of positive feedback systems
on Root locus. (5 hours)

Frequency domain analysis:

Bode Plot: Construction, Concept of gain margin and phase margin-

stability analysis. (4 hours)

Frequency domain specifications - correlation between time domain and

3 frequency domain responses (Resonant peak and resonant frequency). (2 11
hours)

Polar plot: Gain margin and phase margin, Stability analysis. (2 hours)

Nyquist stability criterion. Concept of Nichols Chart. (3 hours)

State space representation of systems:

Introduction to state-space modelling: State variables, state equations.

State variable representation of electrical systems. (2 hours)

Relationship between State space and transfer function models: Derivation

of transfer functions from state equations. Controllable, Observable and
Diagonal/Jordan canonical forms.
Introduction to similarity transformations (concept only).
4
(4 hours) 11

Solution of time invariant systems: Solution of time response of

autonomous systems and forced systems. State transition matrix -
computation using Method of Laplace Transform and Cayley Hamilton
theorem. (4 hours)

Controllability & Observability: Definition, Kalman’s test.

(1 hour)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module,
 Total of 8 Questions, each out of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 To represent continuous time systems in the classical domain. K2

Analyse the time domain responses of linear systems and predict K2

CO2 and diagnose transient response parameters of the system for

standard input functions.
Analyse dynamics systems for their performance and stability K3
CO3
using Root locus and frequency response.

CO4 Represent and analyse dynamic systems using state-space. K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
5th
1 Modern Control Engineering Katsuhiko Ogata Pearson edition,
2009
5th
2 Control Systems Engineering Norman S. Nise Wiley edition,
2009
5th
3 Control Systems Engineering I. J. Nagrath, M. Gopal New Age edition,
2009

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
9th
1 Automatic Control Systems, Kuo B. C, Prentice Hall of India edition,20
14
4th
Control Systems Principles and
2 Gopal M. Tata McGraw Hill. edition,
Design 2012
12th
Pearson Education
3 Modern Control Systems Dorf R. C. , Bishop R. H edition,
India
2013
 SEMESTER S6

COMPUTER COMMUNICATION & NETWORK SECURITY

Course Code PCEOT602 CIE Marks 60

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)
Exam
Credits 3 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
Hours
Course
Prerequisites (if any) None Program Core Theory
Type

Course Objectives:

1.The syllabus is prepared with a view to equip the Engineering Graduates to learn basic concepts in
data communication and network security.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Data Transmission and Encoding Techniques
Digital-To-Digital Conversion: Line Coding Schemes: Unipolar, Polar,
Bipolar - Block Coding, Scrambling, Analog-To-Digital Conversion: Pulse

1 Code Modulation, Delta Modulation - Digital-To-Analog Conversion: ASK,

FSK, PSK. Transmission Modes: Parallel and Serial Transmission, 9
Asynchronous, Synchronous, Isochronous Transmission, Multiplexing -
TDM, FDM, WDM
Overview of Computer Communication
Introduction: - Types of Computer Networks, Network Software - Protocol
Hierarchies, Connection oriented and Connection less hierarchies, Reference
Models - ISO-OSI Reference Model, TCP/IP Reference Model –
Comparison of OSI and TCP/IP reference models.

2 Physical Layer: - Guided Transmission Media– Twisted Pair, Coaxial and

Fiber Optics 10
Data Link Layer: – design issues - Error Detection: Parity Check,
Checksum, CRC, Error Correction: Hamming code
- Flow Control: Stop-and-Wait, Go-Back-N, and Selective- Repeat. Multiple
Access Protocols: ALOHA, CSMA, CSMA/CD, Collision free protocols
 Network Layer and Transport Layer
Network Layer Design Issues, Routing Algorithm – Optimality principle -
Flooding - Distance vector routing – Link state routing –Congestion Control
Algorithms – General principles – Congestion prevention policies – Choke
3 9
packets – Random Early Detection.
Transport layer – transport services, elements of transport protocols,
introduction to UDP, introduction to TCP – TCP service model, TCP
segment header, TCP connection establishment and release
Network Security
Introduction to network security, principles of cryptography – symmetric key

4 cryptography, public key cryptography, message integrity and digital

8
signatures, securing e-mail, securing TCP connections, IPSec, VPN,
Firewalls and Intrusion detection systems

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Identify the concepts of data transmission and apply signal K3
encoding techniques and multiplexing in data transmission
CO1
(Cognitive Knowledge:Apply)

Discuss the basic concepts used in data communication and K2

CO2 computer (Cognitive Knowledge: Understand)

networking Describe the design issues and protocols in data link K2

CO3 layer (Cognitive Knowledge: Understand)

Familiarize with routing algorithms and transport layer protocols K2

CO4 (Cognitive Knowledge: Understand)

Understand the basics of network (Cognitive Knowledge: K2

CO5
Understand)
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 2

CO2 3 2 1 2

CO3 2 3 1 2 2 2

CO4 2 3 3 2 1 2

CO5 2 2 2 1 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Computer Networks Andrew S. Tanenbaum Pearson 5/e,2019
and David J. Wetheral
2 Computer Networking: A Top James F. Kurose and
Pearson 6/e,2013
Down Approach Keith W. Ross

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Data Communications
1 Behrouz A. Forouzan Tata McGraw Hill 5/e,2017
and Networking

Computer Networking Prentice-Hall

2 William Stallings 2004
with Internet Protocols

Computer Networking
3 Fred Halsall 5/e
and the Internet
Computer Networking: A

4 F. Kurose and K. W. Ross Top-Down Approach Pearson Education 6/e,2012

Featuring Internet

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://youtu.be/ifgs0uypC78?si=OQSgLGJFfDYJsfcd

2 https://youtu.be/sG6WGvzmVaw?si=KyjOYVY9I7VADL1n

3 https://youtu.be/O--rkQNKqls?si=Ag8Sf3kBDkstci-9

4 https://youtu.be/iTVyKbDCJrA?si=97T6ZfFdlUyC6ttt
 SEMESTER S6

DIGITAL PROTECTION OF POWER SYSTEMS

Course Code PEEET631 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week 3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60

(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PCEET501, Course Type Theory

PBEET604

Course Objectives:

1. To deliver fundamental concepts to design various electronic circuits to implement

various relaying functions.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction: Need for protective systems, Zones of protection, Current

transformers and voltage transformers (Electromagnetic and Capacitive
voltage transformers), Principle of operation of magneto optic CT/ PT,
effect on relaying philosophy.
9
Relays: Over current relays - time-current characteristics of over current
1 relays: definite time over current relays, inverse Definite Minimum time -
directional over current relays, current setting and time setting -
Numerical Problems - Differential relays: Operating and restraining
characteristics, types of differential relays, Distance relays: impedance
relays, reactance relays, mho relays (basic principles and characteristics
only)
Protection of Transmission Lines: Schemes of distance protection,
Differential line protection, Phase comparison line protection.
Protection of Bus-bar,Transformer and Generator & Motor: Types of 9
2 faults, differential protection: High impedance and low impedance
differential protection schemes, harmonic restraint relay, Restricted Earth
Fault Protection, frame leakage protection, stator and rotor protection
against various types of faults.
 Digital (Numerical) Relays: Basic Components of numerical Relays
with block diagram, Processing Unit, Human machine Interface, Principle
of operation, Comparison of numerical relays with electromechanical and
static relays, Advantages of numerical relays - communication in
protective relays (IEC 61850), Information handling with substation
3 9
automation system (SAS) Signal Conditioning Subsystems: Surge
Protection Circuits, Anti-aliasing filter, Conversion Subsystem, The
Sampling Theorem, aliasing, Sample and Hold Circuit, Concept of analog
to digital and digital to analog conversion, Idea of sliding window
concept, Fourier, Discrete and fast Fourier transforms
Signal processing techniques: Sinusoidal wave based algorithms, Fourier
Analysis based algorithms (half cycle and full cycle), Least squares based
algorithm. Digital filters – Fundamentals of Infinite Impulse Response
Filters, Finite Impulse Response filters, Filters with sine and cosine
9
windows.
4
Wide Area Protection and Measurement: Phasor Measurement Units,
concept of synchronized sampling, Definition of wide-area protection,
Architectures of wide-area protection, concept of Adaptive relaying,
advantages of adaptive relaying and its application, Adaptive Differential
protective scheme.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out of
 Total of 8 Questions, each which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)

(8x3 =24marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Identify the relay protection scheme suitable for overcurrent, differential K3

CO1
and distance protection.
Develop the protection scheme for bus bars, transformers, generators, K3
CO2
motors and distribution systems using appropriate protective relays
CO3 Illustrate the operation of a numerical relay. K2

CO4 Explain signal processing methods and algorithms in digital protection K2

CO5 Infer emerging protection schemes in power systems K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2

CO2 3 2

CO3 3 2

CO4 3 2

CO5 3 2
 Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Digital Protection of Power A. T. Johns and S. K. Peter Peregrinus Ltd,

System Salman UK 1995

2 Research study press

Computer Relaying for Power A. G. Phadke and James
Systems Ltd, John Wiley & 1988
S. Thorpe
Sons, Taunton, UK
3 Power System Protection and Badri Ram and D. N. Tata McGraw Hill
Switchgear Viswakarma Education, Pvt Edition 2011

4 Digital Signal Processing in

Power System Protection and Waldemar Rebizant Springer Publication 2008
Control

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

1
https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/107/117107148/ (NPTEL lecture IIT Roorkee)
 SEMESTER S6
R-PROGRAMMING

Course Code PEEOT631 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
Exam
Credits 3 2Hrs. 30 Min.
Hours
GBEST204, Course
Prerequisites (if any) PE - Theory
PEEET413 Type

Course Objectives:

1. Illustrate uses of conditional and iterative statements in R programs.

2. Write, test and debug R programs
3. Illustrate the use of Probability distributions and basic statistical functions.
4. Visualize different types of data
5. Comprehend regression modelling using R
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction to R and Data Structures

The R Environment: Command Line Interface and Batch processing,
R Packages, Basic Concepts: Variables, Data Types.
1 Data Structures: Vectors (vector operations and factor vectors), Lists
and their operations, Data Frames, Matrices and arrays, Control 9
Statements: Branching and looping (for loops, while loops, controlling
loops), Functions: Function as arguments, Named arguments
Data Handling and Transformation
Reading and Writing Data: Importing data from Text files and other
software, exporting data, importing data from databases (Database
2 Connection packages), Handling Missing Data: NA, NULL
Data Manipulation: Combining data sets, Transformations, Binning 9
Data, Subsets, summarizing functions, Data Cleaning (Finding and
removing duplicates, Sorting)
 Statistical Analysis with R
Analysing Data: Summary statistics, Statistical Tests: Continuous
3
Data, Discrete Data, Power 9
Probability Distributions: Common distributions (type arguments),
Probability distributions, Normal distributions
Data Visualization and Regression Models
Data Visualization: R Graphics (Overview, Customizing Charts,
Graphical parameters, Basic Graphics functions), Lattice Graphics
(Lattice functions, Customizing Lattice Graphics), Ggplot
4
Introduction to Regression Models: Building linear models (model 9
fitting, predict values using models, analysing the fit),
Refining the model, Generalized linear models (Logistic Regression,
Poisson Regression)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

Illustrate uses of conditional and iterative statements in R programs. K3

CO1
Write, test and debug R programs K3
CO2
Illustrate the use of Probability distributions and basic statistical K3
CO3 functions.

Visualize different types of data K3

CO4
Comprehend regression modelling using R K2
CO5
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 - 3 - - - - - - 2

CO2 3 3 3 - 3 - - - - - - 3

CO3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - 1

CO4 3 2 2 2 2 - - - - - - 2

CO5 3 3 - - 2 - - - - - - 2

Text Books

Name of the Name of the Edition and

Sl. No Title of the Book
Author/s Publisher Year

R in a Nutshell Second
1 Joseph Adler O’reilly
edition,2012
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Addison Wesley
R for Everyone- Advanced
1 Jared P Lander data analytics series,
analytics and graphics
Pearson
The art of R programming, A

2 Tour of Statistical, Software Norman matloff O’reilly

Design
R in action, Data analysis and
3 Robert Kabacoff Manning
graphics with R
Hands-on programming with
R, Write your own functions
4 Garret Grolemund O’reilly
and
simulations,

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/aic20_sp35/preview

2 https://onlinecourses.swayam2.ac.in/aic20_sp35/preview

3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/111/104/111104100/

4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/111/104/111104100/
 SEMESTER S6

HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING

Course Code PEEET633 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week 3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60

(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) NIL Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce basic terms and techniques applicable to high voltage acand dc networks.
2. To learn about generation of different type of High voltage waveforms, their measurement
and analysis.
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Generation of High DC and AC Voltages-half-wave rectifier circuit-

Cockroft-Walton voltage multiplier circuit- Electrostatic generator-
Generation of high AC voltages-Cascaded Transformers-Series resonant
circuit.
1
Generation of Impulse Voltages and Currents- Impulse voltage- Impulse
9
generator circuits- Multistage impulse generator circuit- Construction of
impulse generator- Triggering of impulse generator-Impulse current
generation.
High Voltage Measurement Techniques -Measuring Spark Gaps - Sphere-
to-sphere Spark Gap -Rod-to-rod Spark Gap - Electrostatic Voltmeter-
Field Sensors - Electrically Short Sensors, Electrically Long Sensors,
Potential-free Probes, Generator-mode Sensors, Electro- optical and
Magneto-optical Field Sensors - Voltage Dividers - Instrument
2
Transformers - Measurements of R.M.S. Value, Peak Value and 9
Harmonics - Current Measurement
Dielectric measurements- Dissipation Factor and Capacitance, Insulation
Resistance, Conductivity, Dielectric System Response-Partial discharge
measuring technique- Requirements on a partial discharge measuring
 system - Measuring systems for apparent charge – Partial discharge
measurements on high-voltage transformers, high-voltage cables, high-
voltage gas-insulated substations.
.
Classification of Voltages and Overvoltages-Origin of Overvoltages –
Representative Overvoltages- Performance Criterion –Withstand voltage.
Insulation Coordination Procedure- Determination of Representative
Voltages and Overvoltages-Continuous Power Frequency Voltage,
Temporary Overvoltages, Slow-Front Overvoltages, Fast-Front
Overvoltages
3
Determination of Coordination Withstand Voltage (Ucw)-Deterministic
Approach, Statistical Approach: Risk of Failure - Determination of 9
Required Withstand Voltage (Urw)-Altitude Correction Factor, Safety
Factor (Ks )- Selection of Standard Withstand Voltage (Uw)- Surge
Arresters- Rated Voltage- Discharge Current- Impulse Current Tests-
Residual Voltages- Arrester Durability Requirements.
High voltage Testing of insulators, bushings, isolators, circuit breakers,
transformers, surge diverters, cables.
Insulation Systems for AC Voltages -Cables, bushings and transformers-
Insulation Systems for DC Voltages- Capacitors, HVDC bushings and
4 Cables-Insulation Systems for Impulse Voltages -Electrical Stress and
Strength -Energy Storage -Impulse Capacitors (Energy Storage or Surge 9
Capacitors)
Lightning Protection- Light and Laser Technology- X-ray Technology-
Electrostatic Particle Precipitation, Ionization- Spark plugs.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

CO1 Identify different high voltage and current waveform generation K1

circuits.
CO2 Implement different sensing & measurement techniques for high K3
voltage and current measurement.
CO3 Describe insulation coordination and surge arrestor design. K2

CO4 Implement different testing methods for equipments and applications K3

of HV systems.
CO5 Explain the various technologies for lightning protection. K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO1 PO1

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9
0 1 2

CO1 3 2

CO2 3 2

CO3 3 2 2

CO4 3 2 2

CO5 3 2 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 High Voltage Engineering C. L. Wadhwa New Age International 2011

High Voltage Engineering

2 Fundamentals – Technology Andreas Kuchler Springer 2018
Applications

3 Naidu M. S. and
High Voltage Engineering Tata Mc Graw Hill 2004
Kamaraju V.

4 High Voltage Engineering Kuffel E. Zaengl S. and

Elsevier India P Ltd 2005
Fundamentals Kuffel J.
 SEMESTER S6

INTERNET OF THINGS

Course Code PEEET634 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week (L: 3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60

T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) Nil Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. This course aims to introduce IOT fundamentals.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction to IoT technology: Definitions of IoT, Characteristics of

IoT devices – power, computational constraints, IoT Architectural view –
Middleware based architecture, Service oriented architecture, M2M
1 Communication and IoT, Typical application areas of IoT technology
(case studies of at least four domains) - Energy management and Smart 9
grid, IoT for Home, Cities, Environment monitoring, Agriculture, Supply
chain and customer monitoring

Components of IoT technology: Identification/Addressing - Electronic

Product Codes, RFID, ubiquitous code, IPv4, IPv6. Sensors and
2 Actuators*. IoT Hardware**, IoT Software – overview of Operating
systems, Firmware, Middle ware, Application software used in IoT. 9
Connectivity for IoT devices – characteristics.

Communication technologies for IoT : Zigbee - key features,

architecture, limitations, Bluetooth technology - bluetooth stack, piconet,
scatternet, limitations, Bluetooth Low Energy (key features, architecture,
3 limitations), Wifi (IEEE 802.11) technology – key features, limitations, 9
Cellular technology – GSM, 3G, 4GLTE (overview), features,
limitations, LoRa technology – features, LoRaWAN architecture,
6LoWPAN – features, protocol stack, Narrow Band (NB- IoT) – features,
 applications, Sigfox – features, applications

IoT Data Management : Storage technologies for IoT hardware –

Volatile, Non-volatile, Embedded (MTP/OTP), external flash
(NAND/NOR), DRAM, eflash, UFS, eMMC (overview of technologies).
Cloud and IoT, Cloud computing – architecture, advantages of cloud
4
computing, Software as a Service (SaaS), Platform as a Service (PaaS),
9
Infrastructure as a Service (IaaS). Case study of commercial cloud
computing platforms like - Microsoft Azure IoT Suite, Google Cloud's
IoT Platform, IBM Watson IoT Platform. IoT analytics

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

CO1 Explain in a concise manner the architecture of IoT K2

CO2 Identify various hardware and software components used in IoT K3

CO3 Discuss the various communication technologies and interfaces in IoT K2

Describe the usage of modern technologies like cloud computing for

CO4 K2
data management in IoT

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 2 2 2

CO2 3 2 2 2 2

CO3 3 2 2 1 2

CO4 3 2 2 1 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Internet of Things : McGraw Hill (India) 2nd

1 Architecture and Design Rajkamal Private Limited. edition,20
Principles” 22

1st
Orient Blackswan Edition,201
“Internet of Things (A Hands- Vijay Madisetti and
2 Private Limited - 5
on- Approach)” Arshdeep Bahga
New Delhi
 Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Internet of things: A survey on IEEE

1 enabling technologies, Al-Fuqaha Communications 2015
protocols, and applications Surveys & Tutorials

The MIT Press

March 20,
2 The Internet of Things Samuel Greengard Essential Knowledge
2015
series Paperback

The Internet of Things:

1st
Converging Technologies for Ovidu Vermesan and
3 River Publishers Edition,
Smart Environments and Peter Friess
2013
Integrated Ecosystems

. Internet of Things - From 1st

Peter Friess, Ovidiu
4 Research and Innovation to River Publishers Edition,20
Vermesan
Market Deployment 14

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.

https://youtu.be/WUYAjxnwjU4?si=s58W-NKMrEQMaJ8m
1
https://youtu.be/BXDxYh1EV2w?si=8oFtQB9vycC_c-t2

https://youtu.be/z3VEZPwl5gA?si=tNuzG_By-KBU3ks_

2 https://youtu.be/SXz0XR68dwE?si=1tVN1g9FQcGp87li

https://youtu.be/TvzgzO6xKrY?si=gYzJstW51MTNsgKj

https://youtu.be/qko-f1VDhCM?si=0tWM_OHS395ESV_w

3 https://youtu.be/d9QfVpCG00Y?si=qeHk8tPg_torr2yX

https://youtu.be/1zQ8wbBozqI?si=7vOSHMt8OT3nQINO

https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLE7VH8RC_N3bpVn-
4
e8QzOAHziEgmjQ2qE&si=rr5Fpuew5q9_Y4qg
 SEMESTER S6

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Course Code PEEET636 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

PCEET603/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type Theory
PEEOT522

Course Objectives:

1. To provide a thorough understanding of the realisation, design and analysis of DSP systems

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction to DSP and Discrete Fourier transform:

Basic elements of DSP system. Advantages and applications.

Review of Discrete-Time Fourier transform (DTFT) and its properties.

Frequency domain sampling, Discrete Fourier transform (DFT) - DFT pair, 10

1
properties of DFT, frequency response analysis of signals using the DFT,
circular convolution using DFT, linear filtering based on DFT.

Fast Fourier transform (FFT): Introduction, Radix -2 decimation in time FFT

algorithm, Radix-2 decimation in frequency algorithm, IDFT using FFT
algorithm.

Realisation of Filters:

Introduction to IIR and FIR systems.

2 7
Structures for IIR Systems: Direct-Form Structures, Cascade-Form
Structures, Parallel-Form Structures, Lattice Structures for IIR Systems.

Structures for FIR Systems: Direct-Form Structure, Cascade-Form

 Structures, Lattice Structure. Linear Phase FIR filters.

Signal Flow Graphs and Transposed Structures.

Design of Digital Filters:

General considerations, Causality and its implications, characteristics of

practical frequency selective filters.

IIR filter design: Discrete time IIR filter from analog filter (Butterworth),
3 IIR filter (LPF, HPF, BPF, BRF) design by Impulse Invariance, Bilinear
transformation. 10

FIR filter design: Structures of FIR filter, Linear phase FIR filter

Filter design using windowing techniques (Rectangular, Hanning,

Hamming), frequency sampling Techniques.

Finite Word Length effects in Digital Filters:

Fixed point and floating-point number representations, Comparison,

Truncation and Rounding errors.

Quantization noise, Derivation for quantization noise power, coefficient

quantization error, Product quantization error.

Overflow error, Round-off noise power. Limit cycle oscillations due to

4
product round-off and overflow errors, signal scaling.
9
Introduction to TMS320 Family:

Architecture, C24x CPU and other components; Assembly language

Instructions, Instruction Set summary, simple programs.

Design & Implementation and Filter Structures: MATLAB functions and

TMS320 Implementation (Demo/Assignment only)
 Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60

divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

CO1 Analyse discrete-time systems using DFT K2

CO2 Realise IIR and FIR filters K3

CO3 Design of IIR and FIR filters K3

CO4 Analyse effect of word length in digital filters K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Digital Signal Processing:

John G. Proakis
1 Principles, Algorithm & Pearson 4th Edition
Dimitris G. Manolakis
Application

Discrete-Time Signal A. Oppenheim and

2 Pearson-Prentice Hall 2nd Edition
Processing R. Schafer

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

Digital Signal processing-A Emmanuel C. Ifeachor,

1 Pearson Education 2nd Edition
Practical Approach and Barrie W. Jervis

S. Salivahanan, A.
2 Digital Signal Processing Vallavaraj, and C. Tata Mcgraw Hill 2nd Edition
Gnapriya
 SEMESTER S6

CLOUD COMPUTING

Course Code PEEET637 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) Nil Course Type PE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1.To enable learners to understand the concepts of cloud computing and its enabling technologies
2.Familiarize with mainstream cloud computing platforms and the services they offer.
3.To enable learners to have a basic understanding of virtualization, cloud security and cloud-based
programming

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Traditional computing- Limitations. Overview of Computing Paradigms-
Grid Computing, Cluster Computing, Distributed Computing, Utility
Computing, Cloud Computing. NIST reference Model-Basic terminology
and concepts. Cloud characteristics, benefits and challenges, Roles and
1 Boundaries. Cloud delivery (service) models-Infrastructure-as-a-Service
8
(IaaS), Platform-as-a-Service(PaaS),Software-as-a-Service (SaaS), XaaS
(Anything-as-a-service)-Cloud deployment models- Public cloud,
Community cloud, Private cloud, Hybrid cloud.

Introduction to virtualization-Virtualizing physical computing resources,

Virtual Machines (Machine virtualization), Non-virtualized v/s Virtualized
machine environments. Types of VMs- Process VM v/s System VM.
Emulation, Interpretation and Binary translation. Virtualization layers.
2
Hypervisors/VMM - Types of Hypervisors. Full Virtualization, Para
8
Virtualization, Hardware-assisted virtualization, OS level virtualization.
Basics of Network Virtualization, Storage Virtualization and Desktop
Virtualization.
 Resource provisioning techniques: Static and Dynamic Resource
provisioning in cloud. Open Source Software platforms for Private Cloud :
OpenStack, Eucalyptus, Open Nebula, Nimbus

Popular public cloud platforms: AWS - AWS ecosystem, Compute

3 services: EC2, Advanced compute services, Storage services: Amazon S3,
11
Amazon EBS, Database services, other major services. Google Cloud: IaaS
offerings- Compute Engine, Storage PaaS offerings-GAE. SaaS offerings.
Microsoft Azure: Azure Platform Architecture, Hyper-V, Azure VM,
Compute services, Storage services

Cloud programming: Parallel Computing and Programming Paradigms,

Map Reduce – Hadoop Library from Apache, HDFS, Pig Latin Basics,
Apache Spark

Fundamentals of Cloud Security: Basic terms & concepts in security –

4 Threat agents, Cloud security threat/risks, Trust. OS security – Virtual 10
Machine security – Security of Virtualization – Security risk posed by
Shared Images, Security risk posed by Management OS, Infrastructure
security – Network Level, Host Level, Application Level, Security of the
Physical systems, Identity and Access Management

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one full
question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

CO1 Explain the various cloud computing models and services K2

CO2 Demonstrate the significance of implementing virtualization techniques K2

Explain about the different private cloud platforms, and the services
CO3 K2
offered by popular cloud service providers

Apply appropriate cloud programming methods to solve big data

CO4 K3
problems

CO5 Describe the need for security mechanisms in cloud K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 2

CO2 2 2 2 2

CO3 2 1 3 1 1 2

CO4 2 3 3 3 3 2

CO5 2 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Thomas Erl, Zaigham
Cloud Computing: Concepts,
1 Mahmood, Ricardo Prentice Hall 2013
Technology and Architecture
Puttini
Rajkumar Buyya,
McGraw Hill
2 Mastering Cloud Computing Christian Vecchiola, 2017
Education
S. Thamarai Selvi
Cambridge
3 Cloud Computing Sandeep Bhowmik 2017
University Press

Reference Books
Name of the
Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Edition and Year
Publisher
Cloud Computing: Theory and Morgan Kaufmann
Dan C. Marinescu 2018
Practice publications
Rajkumar Buyya,
Cloud Computing: Principles
James Broberg, Andrzej Wiley 2013
and Paradigms M. Goscinski

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module No. Link ID

Module - I https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105167

Module - II https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106104182

https://cloud.google.com/docs/
Module - III https://docs.aws.amazon.com/
https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/
Module - IV https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105167
 SEMESTER S6

OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES

Course Code PEEET638 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type PE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. The broad objective of the course is to introduce classical optimization, its need and
techniques suitable for application in engineering problems

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Motivation and introduction to optimization in engineering practice

Properties of single variable functions and optimality criteria, Region

elimination methods, Polynomial estimation methods - quadratic
estimation, Bisection method, Newton raphson method, Secant
1 method, Cubic search method 11

Functions of several variables, optimality criteria, Direct search

method, Hooke-Jeeves pattern search method, Powell’s method,
Gradient search methods - Cauchy’s method, Newton’s method

Formulation of linear programming models, Graphical solution in two

variables, Standard form
2 9
Simplex method, Duality, Dual simplex method - Karmarkar’s method

Equality constrained problems - Lagrange multipliers - Kuhn Tucker

conditions - Kuhn Tucker theorems - Saddlepoint conditions - Second
3 order optimality conditions - Generalized Lagrangian multiplier 10
method
 Transformation methods - Concept of penalty - penalty functions -
Method of Multipliers

Constrained direct search - simple direct search method - Complex

method - Random search methods

4 Linearization methods for constrained Problems - Successive linear 9

problems - Separable programming - Method of feasible directions -
Simplex extensions for linearly constrained problems - Generalized
reduced gradient method

PS: Demonstrations of various techniques can be done using softwares like Scilab / Matlab /
Octave or lower end softwares like Maxima

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
To evaluate the optimality criteria and methods for functions
CO1 with single variable K4

To evaluate the optimality criteria and methods for functions

CO2 with several variables K4

To understand and apply linear programming techniques for

CO3 K3
optimization
CO4 To explore optimization techniques for constrained problems K3

CO5 To explore search techniques and applications in optimization K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 3 2

CO2 3 3 2 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 3 2

CO4 3 3 2 3 2

CO5 3 3 2 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Engineering Optimization, A Ravindran, K M
1 John Wiley and Sons 2006
Methods and Applications Ragsdell, G V Reklaitis

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Introduction to Linear Dimitris Bertsimas, John
1 Athena Scientific 1997
Optimization N Tsitsiklis
Stories about Maxima and American
2 V M Tikhomirov 1990
Minima Mathematical Society
 SEMESTER S6
MACHINE LEARNING
Course Code PBEOT604 CIE Marks 60
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:1 ESE Marks 40
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30Min.
GYEST305,
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type PBL
UCEST105

Course Objectives:

1. To equip students with overall understanding of the underlying mathematical and algorithmic
concepts of machine learning.
2. To understand and perform various data pre-processing and visualization in using various
python libraries
3. To implement various machine learning algorithms using python.
4. To evaluate and optimize machine learning models for diverse applications

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Mathematics for Machine Learning. -Association of two variables -
Discrete variables, Ordinal and Continuous variable, Probability calculus -
Summary Statistics, probability distributions, Inductive statistics - Point
1
estimation, Interval estimation, Hypothesis Testing - Basic definitions, t- 9
test,F-test, ANOVA
Introduction to machine learning algorithms - supervised vs.
unsupervised learning, regression and classification, linear discriminant
analysis, decision trees, random forests, and bagging. Unsupervised -
2
Principal Component Analysis, clustering algorithms, SVMs, re-sampling 9
methods: cross-validation and bootstrapping

Introduction to python for ML - essential python libraries and ML

3 functions(NumPy, pandas, Matplotlib, SciKit-Learn), working with data sets 9
 – data cleaning and pre-processing functions, Data visualization- bar,scatter,
histogram, heatmaps.

ML algorithm implementation with python - Linear Regression Simple

and multiple linear regression, Model evaluation metrics: MSE, RMSE, R²,
Classification Algorithms - Logistic regression, k-Nearest Neighbours (k-
NN), Decision Trees, Model evaluation metrics: accuracy, precision, recall,
4 9
F1-score, Support Vector Machines (SVM), Ensemble methods (Random
Forest, Gradient Boosting), Clustering Algorithms -K-means clustering,
Hierarchical clustering.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 60 marks, ESE: 40 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Project Internal Ex-1 Internal Ex-2 Total

5 30 12.5 12.5 60

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each
module. 2 questions will be given from each module, out of
 Total of 8 Questions, which 1 question should be answered. Each question
each carrying 2 marks can have a maximum of 2 sub divisions. Each question
carries 6 marks. 40

(8x2 =16 marks)

(4x6 = 24 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Understand the relationships between different types of variables
K2
(discrete, ordinal, and continuous) using summary statistics and

CO1 probability distributions, and perform hypothesis testing including t-tests

and F-tests.
Apply different supervised and unsupervised machine learning algorithms
K3
(such as regression, classification, clustering, and dimensionality

CO2 reduction) and their appropriate applications in solving real-world

problems.
Apply essential Python libraries (NumPy, Pandas, Matplotlib) to clean,
K3
preprocess, and visualize data sets, preparing data for machine learning
CO3 applications.
Implement machine learning algorithms (such as linear regression,
K3
logistic regression, k-Nearest Neighbors, Decision Trees, SVM, Random

CO4 Forest, Gradient Boosting, and clustering) in Python and evaluate their
performance using relevant metrics.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

3 2 2
CO1

3 3 2 2 2
CO2

3 3 2 2
CO3

3 3 2 3 2
CO4
 Text Books

Sl. Name of the Edition and

Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
No Publisher Year

Mathematics for Machine Marc Peter Deisenroth, Cambridge 1st Edition,

Learning A. Aldo Faisal, Cheng University Press 2020
1 Soon Ong

Pattern Recognition and Christopher M. Springer 1st Edition,

Machine Learning Bishop 2006
2

Python Data Science Jake VanderPlas O'Reilly Media 1st Edition,

Handbook: Essential Tools for 2016
3 Working with Data

Hands-On Machine AurélienGéron O'Reilly Media 2nd

Learning with Scikit- Edition,
4 Learn, Keras, and 2019
TensorFlow

Introduction to Machine Andreas C. Müller, O'Reilly Media 1st Edition,

Learning with Python: A Sarah Guido 2016
5 Guide for Data Scientists

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc23_cs18/preview

2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc23_cs18/preview
3 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105152
4 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105152
 PBL Course Elements

L: Lecture R: Project (1 Hr.), 2 Faculty Members

(3 Hrs.) Tutorial Practical Presentation
Simulation/
Laboratory Presentation
Lecture delivery Project identification
Work/ (Progress and Final Presentations)
Workshops
Group
Project Analysis Data Collection Evaluation
discussion
Question
answer Analytical thinking
Project Milestone Reviews, Feedback,
Sessions/ and Testing
Project reformation (If required)
Brainstorming self-learning
Sessions
Guest Speakers Poster Presentation/
Case Study/ Field
(Industry Prototyping Video Presentation: Students present their
Survey Report
Experts) results in a 2 to 5 minutes video

Assessment and Evaluation for Project Activity

Sl. No Evaluation for Allotted

Marks
1 Project Planning and Proposal 5
2 Contribution in Progress Presentations and Question Answer 4
Sessions
3 Involvement in the project work and Team Work 3
4 Execution and Implementation 10
5 Final Presentations 5
6 Project Quality, Innovation and Creativity 3
Total 30

1. Project Planning and Proposal (5 Marks)

 Clarity and feasibility of the project plan

 Research and background understanding
 Defined objectives and methodology

2. Contribution in Progress Presentation and Question Answer Sessions (4 Marks)

 Individual contribution to the presentation

 Effectiveness in answering questions and handling feedback

3. Involvement in the Project Work and Team Work (3 Marks)

 Active participation and individual contribution

  Teamwork and collaboration

4. Execution and Implementation (10 Marks)

 Adherence to the project timeline and milestones

 Application of theoretical knowledge and problem-solving
 Final Result

5. Final Presentation (5 Marks)

 Quality and clarity of the overall presentation

 Individual contribution to the presentation
 Effectiveness in answering questions

6. Project Quality, Innovation, and Creativity (3 Marks)

 Overall quality and technical excellence of the project

 Innovation and originality in the project

Creativity in solutions and approaches

 SEMESTER S6

INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL SYSTEMS

Course Code OEEET611 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
Exam
Credits 3 2 Hrs.30 Min.
Hours
Course
Prerequisites (if any) – Theory
Type

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce various classical tools for analysis of linear control system in time
and frequency domain.

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction to Control Systems, mathematical modelling and Transfer

function Based Analysis

Open loop and Closed loop control systems; Automatic control systems;
Necessity and significance. (1 hour)

Modelling of LTI systems: LTI Systems, Transfer function representation

1
of differential equation in Laplace domain.

Electrical, translational and rotational mechanical systems, DC servo- 9

motor modelling. (4 hours).

Block diagram representation - block diagram reduction. Signal flow graph

- Mason's gain formula. (4 hours)

Performance Analysis of Control Systems:

Time domain analysis of control systems: Impulse and Step responses of

2 first and second order systems - Pole dominance for higher order systems.
Time domain specifications. Steady state error analysis and static error 8
constants (5 hours)
 Characteristic equation. Routh stability criterion. (3 hours)

Root Locus Analysis and Controllers:

Root locus technique: Construction of Root locus - stability analysis-

effect of addition of poles and zeros; Effect of positive feedback systems
on Root locus.
3 8
(5 hours)

Controller design:Types of controllers and their control action-

proportional (P), integral (I), derivative (D), PID control. PID tuning using
Ziegler-Nichols method. (3 hours)

Frequency domain analysis:

Bode Plot: Construction, Concept of gain margin and phase margin-

stability analysis. (4 hours)

Frequency domain specifications - correlation between time domain and

4
frequency domain responses (Resonant peak and resonant frequency). (2
11
hours)

Polar plot: Gain margin and phase margin, Stability analysis. (2 hours)

Nyquist stability criterion. Concept of Nichols Chart. (3 hours)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

CO1 To represent continuous time systems in the classical domain. K2

Analyse the time domain responses of linear systems and predict and K2
CO2 diagnose transient response parameters of the system for standard input
functions.

Analyse dynamics systems for their performance and stability using K3

CO3
Root locus.

Analyse dynamics systems for their performance and stability in K3

CO4
frequency domain.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2

CO2 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

5th
1 Control Systems Engineering Norman S. Nise Wiley Edition,
2009
5th
2 Control Systems Engineering I. J. Nagrath, M. Gopal New Age Edition,
2009

Reference Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

9th
1 Automatic Control Systems, Kuo B. C, Prentice Hall of India Edition,20
14

4th
Control Systems Principles and
2 Gopal M. Tata McGraw Hill. Edition,
Design 2012

12th
3 Pearson Education
Modern Control Systems Dorf R. C. , Bishop R. H Edition,
India
2013

5th
4 Modern Control Engineering Katsuhiko Ogata Pearson Edition,
2009
 SEMESTER S6

ENERGY MANAGEMENT
Course Code:
OEEET612 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week
(L: T:P: R) 3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
Credits 3 Exam 2 Hrs.30 Min.
Hours
Prerequisites (if any) None/ Course
(Course code) Type OE

Course Objectives:

1. To apply energy conservation principles and management techniques to different

energy conversion systems

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

General aspects of energy management and energy audit: Energy

Management – Definition, General principles of energy management and
energy management planning
1 Energy Audit: Definition, need, types and methodologies. Instruments for
energy audit, Energy audit report - Power quality audit 9
Energy conservation in buildings: ECBC code (basic aspects), Building
Management System (BMS).
Energy Efficiency in Electrical Utilities:
Electricity transmission and distribution system, cascade efficiency.
Lighting: Modern energy efficient light sources, life and efficacy
comparison with older light sources, energy conservation in lighting.
Motors: Development of energy efficient motors and the present status,
techniques for improving energy efficiency, necessity for load matching
2
and selection of motors for constant and variable loads.
9
Demand side Management: Introduction to DSM, benefits of DSM,
different techniques of DSM.
Power factor improvement, numerical examples.
Ancillary services: Introduction of ancillary services – Types of Ancillary
services
Energy Management in Electrical Utilities:
3 Boilers: working principle - blow down, energy conservation opportunities
9
in boiler.
 Steam: properties of steam, distribution losses, steam trapping. Identifying
opportunities for energy savings in steam distribution.
Furnace: General fuel economy measures, energy conservation
opportunities in furnaces.
HVAC system: Performance and saving opportunities in Refrigeration and
Air conditioning systems.
Heat Recovery Systems: Waste heat recovery system - Energy saving
opportunities.
Cogeneration: Types and schemes, optimal operation of cogeneration
plants, combined cycle electricity generation.
Energy Economics: Economic analysis: methods, cash flow model, time
value of money, evaluation of proposals, pay-back period, average rate of
4 return method, internal rate of return method, present value method, life
9
cycle costing approach. Computer aided Energy Management Systems
(EMS).

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)

CO1 Analyse the significance of energy management and auditing. K2

CO2 Discuss the energy efficiency and management of electrical loads. K2

CO3 Apply demand side management techniques K2

CO4 Explain the energy management opportunities in industries. K2

CO5 Compute the economic feasibility of the energy conservation measures K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 2 1 1 1

CO2 2 1 1 1 1

CO3 2 1 1 1 1

CO4 2 1 1 1 1

CO5 2 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Publications of Bureau of
Energy Efficiency (BEE).
2 Energy Management and D. Yogi Goswami, Frank
CRC Press 2007
Conservation Handbook Kreith,
3 Energy management Hand The Fairmount Press,
Wayne C. Turner 1997
Book Inc.
4 Energy Management and D. Yogi Goswami, Frank
CRC Press 2007
Conservation Handbook Kreith
5
Industrial energy conservation Charles M. Gottschalk John Wiley & Sons 1996
 SEMESTER S6

RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS

Course Code OEEET613 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week 3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60

(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam 2 Hrs.30 Min.

Hours

Prerequisites (if any) NIL Course

OE - Theory
Type

Course Objectives:

1. To understand energy scenario, energy sources and their utilization

2. To explore society’s present needs and future energy demands
3. To study the principles of renewable energy conversion systems
4. To be exposed to energy conservation methods

SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours

Introduction: Principles of renewable energy; energy and sustainable

development, fundamentals and social implications. Worldwide
renewable energy availability, renewable energy availability in India,
types of renewable energy. 9

Wind Energy: Properties of wind, availability of wind energy in India,

1
wind velocity and power from wind (numerical problems); major
problems associated with wind power, Basic components of wind energy
conversion system (WECS); Classification of WECS- Horizontal axis-
single, double and multi-blade system. Vertical axis - Savonius and
Darrieus types.

Solar Energy: Fundamentals; Solar Radiation; Estimation of solar

radiation on horizontal and inclined surfaces; Solar radiation
2
Measurements - Pyrheliometers, Pyranometer, Sunshine Recorder. Solar
Thermal systems: concentrating and non-concentrating collectors - Flat
 plate collectors; Solar tower electric power plant. Photovoltaic system for
electric power generation – Classification of PV system - Principle of
9
Solar cell, advantages, disadvantages and applications of solar
photovoltaic system.

Biomass Energy: Introduction; Principle of biomass energy generation -

Biofuels; Biomass Resources; Biomass conversion technologies-fixed
dome type biogas plant; Urban waste to energy conversion; Biomass
gasification (Downdraft).
3
Tidal Power: Tides and waves as energy suppliers and their mechanics;
fundamental characteristics of tidal power, classification of tidal power 9
plants - harnessing tidal energy, advantages and limitations.

Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion: Principle of working, classification,

OTEC power stations in the world, environmental impacts associated with
OTEC.
9
Introduction to geothermal energy
4
Green Energy: Introduction, Fuel cells: Classification of fuel cells –
Hydrogen energy; Operating principles, Zero-energy Concepts. Benefits of
hydrogen energy, hydrogen production technologies (electrolysis method
only), hydrogen energy storage, applications of hydrogen energy, problem
associated with hydrogen energy.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/ Examination-1 Examination- 2
Attendance Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.

module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(4x9 = 36 marks)
(8x3 =24marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Describe the environmental aspects of renewable energy resources in
CO1 comparison with various conventional energy systems, their prospects K1
and limitations.

CO2 Understand the concepts of wind energy. K1

Describe the use of solar energy and the various components used in
CO3 the energy production with respect to applications like-heating, K2
cooling, desalination, power generation.
Understand the concept of biomass energy resources and conversion
CO4 K2
principles of tidal energy.
Acquire the basic knowledge of ocean thermal energy conversion.
CO5 K1
Understand the principle of green energy and hydrogen energy.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 2

CO5 3 3 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Non-conventional energy 4th edition

G. D. Rai Khanna
sources 2023

Thomas E. Kissell, David

2 Renewable energy systems M. Buchla, Thomas L. Pearson 2017
Floyd,

3 Non-Conventional Energy Sawhney G. S. 2012

PHI Learning
Resources

Thomas E. Kissell, David

4 Renewable energy systems M. Buchla, Thomas L. Pearson Pearson
Floyd, 2017
 SEMESTER S6

ELECTRICAL SIMULATION LAB

Course Code PCEOL607 CIE Marks 50

Teaching Hours/Week
0:0:3:0 ESE Marks 50
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 2 Exam Hours 2 Hrs.30 Min

Power systems/Linear
Control systems
Prerequisites (if any) (PCEOT503,PCEOT6 Course Type Lab
01)

Course Objectives:

1. To provide students with hands-on experience in simulating and analyzing various aspects of
power systems through digital simulation

2. To bridge the gap between theoretical knowledge and practical application of control system
analysis and design techniques using digital simulation

Expt.
Experiments
No.

POWER SYSTEMS
Plot the IV and PV characteristics of a solar photovoltaic module and determine
1
Maximum Power Point under uniform and partial shaded conditions

Load Flow Analysis –Gauss-Siedel Method /Newton-Raphson Method/Fast Decoupled

2
Method

3 Reactive Power Compensation and power factor correction using capacitor bank

4 Short Circuit Analysis – Symmetrical Faults and Unsymmetrical Faults

5 Transmission Line Modelling (Basic Programming): ABCD constants

6 Modelling of Over current relay for Power system protection

CONTROL SYSTEMS
Determination of transfer function from block diagram of closed loop system and plot
7
pole zero graph .

Observe the performance of Step response of a second order system.

8
Objective: Design a second order system (eg: RLC network) to analyse thefollowing:
 A. The effect of damping factor (ξ: 0, <1,=1,>1) on the unit stepresponse using simulation
study

B. Verification of the delay time, rise time, peak overshoot and settlingtime with the
theoretical values.

Stability Analysis by Frequency Response Methods.

Objective: Plot Bode plot or Nyquist plot of the given transferfunctions to analyse the
following using simulation:

9 A. Determination of Gain Margin and Phase Margin

B. Verification of GM and PM with the theoretical values

C. The effect of controller gain K on the stability,

D. The effect of the addition of poles and zeros on the given system

Performance Analysis using Root-Locus Method.

Objective: Plot the root locus of the given transfer function to analyse thefollowing using
simulation:

10 A. Verification of the critical gain, wo with the theoretical values

B. The effect of controller gain K on the stability

C. The sensitivity analysis by giving small perturbations in given polesand zeros

D. The effect of the addition of poles and zeros on the given system.

11 Design of lead/lag/lead lag compensator

12 Design of PI /PID controller and its effects on the feedback loop response

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 50 marks, ESE: 50 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Preparation/Pre-Lab Work
experiments, Viva and Timely
Internal
Attendance Total
completion of Lab Reports / Record Examination

(Continuous Assessment)

5 25 20 50
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

Procedure/ Result with

Conduct of experiment/
Preparatory Execution of work/ valid inference/ Viva
Record Total
work/Design/ troubleshooting/ Quality of voce
Programming Output
Algorithm

10 15 10 10 5 50

 Submission of Record: Students shall be allowed for the end semester examination only
upon submitting the duly certified record.
 Endorsement by External Examiner: The external examiner shall endorse the record

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Estimate various parameter of a power system network using different load K3
CO1
flow techniques and fault analysis.

CO2 Examine the performance of transmission lines and relays K4

Examine the Time Domain and frequency domain response analysis of K4
CO3 second order control systemsfor assessing the system stability and control
action.
Design compensator for unstable control systems in order to enhance the K3
CO4
system response and stability.

CO5 Design P, PI and PID controllers for continuous process control K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO- PO Mapping (Mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 3 2 3 3 1 1 1 3

CO2 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 3

CO3 3 2 1 3 1 1 3

CO4 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 2

1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

 Text Books

Name of the Edition

Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1
Power System Analysis HadiSaadat McGraw Hill 2/e,2002.

2 Kothari D. P. and I. J.
Modern Power System Analysis TMH 2/e ,2009
Nagrath
3 Eleventh
Richard C. Dorf and
Modern Control Systems,, Pearson Education Edition,20
Robert H. Bishop
09.
4 Nagarath I. J. and Gopal
Control System Engineering,. Wiley Eastern , 2008
M.,

Continuous Assessment (25 Marks)

1. Preparation and Pre-Lab Work (7 Marks)

 Pre-Lab Assignments: Assessment of pre-lab assignments or quizzes that test

understanding of the upcoming experiment.
 Understanding of Theory: Evaluation based on students’ preparation and understanding
of the theoretical background related to the experiments.
2. Conduct of Experiments (7 Marks)

 Procedure and Execution: Adherence to correct procedures, accurate execution of

experiments, and following safety protocols.
 Skill Proficiency: Proficiency in handling equipment, accuracy in observations, and
troubleshooting skills during the experiments.
 Teamwork: Collaboration and participation in group experiments.

3. Lab Reports and Record Keeping (6 Marks)

 Quality of Reports: Clarity, completeness and accuracy of lab reports. Proper

documentation of experiments, data analysis and conclusions.
 Timely Submission: Adhering to deadlines for submitting lab reports/rough record and
maintaining a well-organized fair record.
4. Viva Voce (5 Marks)

 Oral Examination: Ability to explain the experiment, results and underlying

principles during a viva voce session.
Final Marks Averaging: The final marks for preparation, conduct of experiments, viva,
and record are the average of all the specified experiments in the syllabus.

Evaluation Pattern for End Semester Examination (50 Marks)

1. Procedure/Preliminary Work/Design/Algorithm (10 Marks)

 Procedure Understanding and Description: Clarity in explaining the procedure and

understanding each step involved.
 Preliminary Work and Planning: Thoroughness in planning and organizing
materials/equipment.
 Algorithm Development: Correctness and efficiency of the algorithm related to the
experiment.
 Creativity and logic in algorithm or experimental design.
2. Conduct of Experiment/Execution of Work/Programming (15 Marks)

 Setup and Execution: Proper setup and accurate execution of the experiment or
programming task.

3. Result with Valid Inference/Quality of Output (10 Marks)

 Accuracy of Results: Precision and correctness of the obtained results.

 Analysis and Interpretation: Validity of inferences drawn from the experiment or
quality of program output.
4. Viva Voce (10 Marks)

 Ability to explain the experiment, procedure results and answer related questions
 Proficiency in answering questions related to theoretical and practical aspects of the
subject.
5. Record (5 Marks)

 Completeness, clarity, and accuracy of the lab records

SEMESTER 7
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER
ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S7

POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL

Course Code PEEET741 CIE Marks 40

3:0:0:0
Teaching Hours/Week
ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
3
Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
PCEET501, PBEET604
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type PE -Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce analysis techniques for the operation and control of power system.
2. To discuss load scheduling and scheduling of energy.
3. To study power system security and state estimation.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction- Optimum load dispatch - First order gradient method base
point and participation factors. Economic dispatch versus unit commitment. 9
1
Unit Commitment Solution Methods - Priority-List Methods – Security
Constrained Unit Commitment.
Generation with limited supply-Take or pay fuel supply contract-
Introduction to Hydrothermal coordination-Long range and short range
9
scheduling Hydro-electric plant models-scheduling energy problems - types
2
of scheduling problems. Scheduling energy - The Hydrothermal Scheduling
Problem - Hydro scheduling with storage limitation - Introduction to
Pumped storage hydro plants.
Inter change evaluation and power pools- Interchange contracts – Energy
interchange between utilities - Interchange evaluation with unit commitment
9
- Energy banking- power pools. Power system security- Factors Affecting
3
Power System Security - Contingency Analysis: Detection of Network
Problems - Generation Outages - Transmission Outages - An Overview of
Security Analysis.
 Introduction to State estimation in power system, Maximum Likelihood
Weighted Least Squares Estimation - State Estimation of an AC Network -
9
Sources of Error in State Estimation - Detection and Identification of Bad

4 Measurements - Estimation of Quantities Not Being Measured - Network

Observability and Pseudo-measurements - The Use of Phasor Measurement
Units (PMUs) - Application of Power Systems State Estimation - Importance
of Data Verification and Validation.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Analyse various methods of generation scheduling. K4
CO2 Formulate hydro-thermal scheduling problems. K5

CO3 Evaluate power exchange in interconnected power systems. K5

CO4 Analyse security issues in power system networks. K3

CO5 Analyse various state estimation methods. K4

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Power Generation Operation Allen J. Wood & Bruce 3rd edition
1 John Wiley & Sons
and Control F. Wollenberg 2023
John Graigner & William
2 Power System Analysis McGraw Hill 1994
Stevenson
Power System State
Ali Abur, Antonio
3 Estimation: Theory and CRC Press 2004
Gomez
Implementation
 SEMESTER S7

ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND AUDITING

Course Code PEEET742 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) - Course Type PE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To apply energy conservation principles and management techniques to different energy

conversion systems
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
General aspects of energy management and energy audit: Energy
Management – Definition, General principles of energy management and
energy management planning

1 Energy Audit: Definition, need, types and methodologies. Instruments for

energy audit, Energy audit report - Power quality audit 9
Energy conservation in buildings: ECBC code (basic aspects), Building
Management System (BMS).
Energy Efficiency in Electrical Utilities:
Electricity transmission and distribution system, cascade efficiency.
Lighting: Modern energy efficient light sources, life and efficacy
comparison with older light sources, energy conservation in lighting.
Motors: Development of energy efficient motors and the present status,
techniques for improving energy efficiency, necessity for load matching and

2 selection of motors for constant and variable loads.

Demand side Management: Introduction to DSM, benefits of DSM, 9
different techniques of DSM.
Power factor improvement, numerical examples.
Ancillary services: Introduction of ancillary services – Types of Ancillary
services
 Energy Management in Electrical Utilities:
Boilers: working principle - blow down, energy conservation opportunities
in boiler.
Steam: properties of steam, distribution losses, steam trapping. Identifying
opportunities for energy savings in steam distribution.
Furnace: General fuel economy measures, energy conservation

3 opportunities in furnaces. 9
HVAC system: Performance and saving opportunities in Refrigeration and
Air conditioning systems.
Heat Recovery Systems: Waste heat recovery system - Energy saving
opportunities.
Cogeneration: Types and schemes, optimal operation of cogeneration
plants, combined cycle electricity generation.
Energy Economics: Economic analysis: methods, cash flow model, time
value of money, evaluation of proposals, pay-back period, average rate of

4 return method, internal rate of return method, present value method, life
9
cycle costing approach. Computer aided Energy Management Systems
(EMS).
Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Analyse the significance of energy management and auditing. K2
CO2 Discuss the energy efficiency and management of electrical loads. K2

CO3 Apply demand side management techniques K2

CO4 Explain the energy management opportunities in industries. K2

CO5 Compute the economic feasibility of the energy conservation measures K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 1 1 1

CO2 2 1 1 1 1

CO3 2 1 1 1 1

CO4 2 1 1 1 1

CO5 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Publications of Bureau of
1
Energy Efficiency (BEE).
Energy Management and D. Yogi Goswami, Frank
2 CRC Press 2007
Conservation Handbook Kreith,
Energy management Hand The Fairmount Press,
3 Wayne C. Turner 1997
Book Inc.
Energy Management and D. Yogi Goswami, Frank
4 CRC Press 2007
Conservation Handbook Kreith
5 Industrial energy conservation Charles M. Gottschalk John Wiley & Sons 1996
 SEMESTER S7
SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES

Course Code PEEET743 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type PE -Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Describe the constructional details, working and drive circuits of various types of special
electrical machines
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Stepper motors – basic principle - types - variable reluctance, permanent
magnet, hybrid types – constructional features - principle of operation –
comparison - modes of operation – monofilar and bifilar windings – modes
1
of excitation – one phase ON mode, two phase ON mode, half-step mode –
9
micro-stepping - static and dynamic characteristics – open-loop and closed
loop control - applications – numerical problems.
Synchronous Reluctance Motor – Constructional details - principle of
operation - phasor diagram - torque equation - applications.
Switched reluctance motors – constructional details - principle of operation -
2 9
torque equation – characteristics - power converter circuits - control of SRM
- rotor position sensors- torque pulsations – sources of noise - noise
mitigation techniques - applications.
PM Brushless DC motor- constructional details - permanent magnets –
different types - demagnetization characteristics – arrangement of
permanent magnets – magnetization of permanent magnets – axial and
parallel magnetizations- principle of operation – Control of BLDC motor -
3
applications.
9
Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motors - construction - principle of
operation – Control of PMSM – self-control – sensor-less control–
applications - comparison with BLDC motors
 Linear Electric Machines: Linear motors – different types – linear
reluctance motor - linear synchronous motors – construction – comparison.
Linear Induction Motor – Construction- Thrust Equation, Transverse edge
and end effects- Equivalent Circuit, Thrust-Speed characteristics,
4
Applications. 9
Single Phase Special Electrical Machines- AC series Motor, Repulsion
Motor, Hysteresis Motor, Universal Motor- Construction - principle of
operation - applications.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the constructional details, working and drive circuits for K2
CO1
various types of stepper motor.
Explain the constructional details, working and drive circuits for K2
CO2
switched and synchronous reluctance motor.
Explain the constructional details, working and drive circuits for K2
CO3
brushless DC motor and permanent magnet synchronous motor.
Explain the constructional details and working of linear induction K2
CO4
motor
Explain the constructional details and working of single-phase special K2
CO5
electrical machines.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 3

CO2 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 3

CO4 3 3 3

CO5 3 2 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Special Electrical Machines E. G. Janardhanan PHI Learning Private Ist edition
1
Limited 2014
Special Electrical Machines K. Venkataratnam Universities Press Ist edition,
2
2008
A detailed study on Special V. Vedanarayanan Notion Press Ist edition,
3
Electrical Machines 2021
Brushless PM and Reluctance T. J. E. Miller Clarendon Press,
4 1989
Motor Drives Oxford
Permanent magnet R. Krishnan CRC Press.
Ist edition
5 synchronous and Brushless
2016
DC motor Drives
 SEMESTER S7

DISCRETE TIME CONTROL SYSTEMS

Course Code PEEET744 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type Theory
Course Objectives:

1. To provide a strong foundation on the analysis and design techniques on classical and
modern control theory in discrete domain

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Analysis of Sampled Data Systems:

Review of Z Transforms; Sampling Theorem, Impulse Sampling,

Sampling Rate Selection, Data Hold – ZOH, FOH, Pulse Transfer
1 Function, Control configurations. Mapping between the s-plane and the z- 9
plane.
Stability analysis of closed-loop system in the z-plane, Jury’s test, Schur-
Cohn test, Bilinear Transformation, Routh-Hurwitz method in w-plane.
Design of Compensators:
Direct design based on root locus: Design of Lag Compensator, Design of
Lead Compensator, Design of Lead-Lag Compensator.

2 Digital Controller Design in Frequency Domain: Direct design based on 11

frequency response, Design of Lag Compensator, Design of Lead
Compensator, Design of Lag-Lead Compensator, Realization of digital
controllers.
Discrete-time State Space System:
State variable model of discrete data systems with S/H devices - State
transition equations, state diagrams. Relationship between state space
3 9
representation and pulse transfer function, Transformation to canonical
forms and phase variable form.
Solution of state equation, Computation of state transition matrix using
 Cayley-Hamilton theorem and z-transform method.

Design using State Space approach:

Discretization of continuous time state-space equations, Controllability,

4 Observability. 7
State feedback controller design via Pole Placement.
State Observer Design: Full order observers and Reduced order observers.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written )

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Model and analyse discrete-time system using pulse transfer function
CO1 K3
approach.

CO2 Design digital compensators for linear systems. K3

CO3 Model and analyse discrete-time system using state space approach. K3

Design discrete-time state feedback controllers and observers for a

CO4 K3
linear system.

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Digital control system analysis
1 Philips and Nagle Prentice Hall 1984
and design

PHI Learning Private

2 Discrete Time Control Systems K. Ogata 2009.
Limited, New Delhi

3
Digital control and State
M. Gopal Tata McGraw –Hill 1997
Variable methods
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd Ed., Oxford
1 Digital Control Systems B C Kuo 1992
University Press

Digital control systems Theory, Constantine H. Houpis McGraw Hill Book

2 1985
hardware software. and Gary B. Lamont Company

Digital control systems Volume 2nd revised

3 I, Fundamentals , Deterministic Isermann Springer Verlag edition
control 1989

G.F.Franklin,
Digital Control of
4 J. David Powell and 3rd Ed.
Dynamic Systems
M. Workman
 SEMESTER S7

DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

Course Code PEEET746 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type PE -Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the fundamental concepts of Digital Image Processing and study the various
transforms required for image processing.
2. To study spatial and frequency domain image enhancement and image restoration methods.
3. To understand image compression and segmentation techniques.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Digital Image Fundamentals: Image representation, Types of images,
Elements of DIP system, Basic relationship between pixels, Distance

1 Measures, Simple image formation model. Brightness, contrast, hue,

saturation, Mach band effect. Colour image fundamentals-RGB, CMY, HIS 9
models, 2D sampling and quantization.
2D Image transforms: DFT, Properties, Walsh transform, Hadamard
transform, Haar transform, DCT, KL transform and Singular Value
Decomposition.
2
Image Compression: Image compression model, Lossy, lossless
9
compression, Concept of transform coding, JPEG Image compression
standard.
Image Enhancement: Spatial domain methods: Basic Gray Level
Transformations, Histogram Processing, Enhancement Using

3 Arithmetic/Logic Operations, Basics of Spatial Filtering, Smoothing spatial 9

Filters, Sharpening spatial Filters.
Frequency domain methods: low pass filtering, high pass filtering,
 homomorphic filtering.

Image Restoration: Degradation model, Inverse filtering- removal of blur

caused by uniform linear motion, Minimum Mean Square Error (Wiener)

4 Filtering.
9
Image segmentation: Region based approach, clustering, Segmentation based
on thresholding, edge based segmentation, Hough Transform.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Understand different components of image processing system K2
Analyse the various concepts and mathematical transforms necessary K3
CO2
for image processing
CO3 Illustrate the various schemes of image compression K3

CO4 Analyze the filtering and restoration of images K3

CO5 Understand the basic image segmentation techniques K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 3 1 2

CO2 3 3 3 1 2

CO3 3 3 3 1 2

CO4 3 3 3 1 2

CO5 3 3 3 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Digital Image Processing Gonzalez Rafel C PEARSON 4TH

S Jayaraman, S
2 Digital Image Processing Esakkirajan, T McGraw Hill Ist
Veerakumar
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year

1 Digital Image Processing Kenneth R Castleman

Pearson Education 2/e,2003

Fundamentals of digital image

2 processing Anil K Jain PHI 1988

John Wiley
3 Digital Image Processing Pratt William K 4/e,2007

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc24_ee133/preview
2 https://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105135
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KiJo4-IijL4
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/117/105/117105135/
 SEMESTER S7

FUNDAMENTALS OF CYBER SECURITY

Course Code CIE Marks 40

PEEOT741
Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
None/
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type PE -Theory
(Course code)

Course Objectives

1. To familiarize various types of cyber-attacks and cyber-crimes.

2. To providing a comprehensive foundation in securing digital systems against cyber

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Security Concepts: Introduction, The need for security, Security
approaches, Principles of security, Types of Security attacks.
Introduction to Cyber security: Cybercrimes, Types of Cybercrimes -
1
Recent Data Breaches - Recent Cyber security Trends - Case Study: Sim
9
Swapping Fraud, ATM Card Cloning, Hacking email for money, Google
Nest Guard, Phishing, Types of Phishing.
Cryptography Concepts and Techniques: Introduction, plain
text and cipher text, substitution techniques, Transposition techniques,
Encryption and decryption, Symmetric and asymmetric key cryptography,
steganography, Key range and key size.
2
Case Studies of Cryptography: Denial of service attacks, IP spoofing
9
attacks, Secure inter branch payment transactions, Conventional
Encryption and Message Confidentiality, Location of Encryption Devices,
Key Distribution.
Introduction to Ethical Hacking: Footprinting and Reconnaissance,
Scanning Networks, Enumeration, Vulnerability Analysis, System
3 9
Hacking, Malware Threats, Sniffing, Social Engineering, Denial-of-
Service, SQL Injections.

4 Introduction to Vulnerability Scanning: Overview of vulnerability

9
 scanning, Open Port / Service Identification, Banner / Version Check,
Traffic Probe, Vulnerability Probe, Vulnerability Examples, OpenVAS,
Metasploit. Understanding Port and Services tools - Datapipe, Fpipe,
WinRelay, Network Reconnaissance – Nmap.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the basic concepts in security and contemporary cyber threats, K2
including various types of cybercrimes and recent trends in
CO1
cybersecurity.

Summarize basic cryptographic algorithms and security issues K2

CO2
Explain the methods and techniques used in ethical hacking to identify K2
CO3 and mitigate security vulnerabilities.

Explain the basic concepts in vulnerability Scanning. K2

CO4
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 1 1 1 1 1 1

CO2 1 1 1 1 1 1

CO3 1 1 1 1 1 1

CO4 1 1 1 1 1 1
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
1 Anti-Hacker Tool Kit Mike Shema Mc Graw Hill 4th edition
,
Cyber Security Understanding
Nina Godbole and Sunit
2 Cyber Crimes, Computer Wiley
Belpure
Forensics and Legal
Perspectives
Fundamentals of Network
3 Eric Maiwald McGraw-Hill 2004
Security
Computer forensics - Guide to Bill Nelson, Amelia
Course Technology
4 Computer Phillips and Christopher 4th edition
Inc.
Forensics and Investigations Steuart
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Charles J. Brooks,
Christopher Grow,
1 Cybersecurity Essentials John Wiley & Sons. 1st edition
Philip Craig, and
Donald Short
Cryptography and Network
Pearson Education,
2 Security – William Stallings 6th Edition
2013

The Basics of Hacking and 2nd

Penetration Testing: Ethical Edition,
3 Patrick Engebretson Syngress
Hacking and Penetration June 24,
Testing Made Easy 2013
Ethical Hacking: The Complete
Beginner's Guide to Learning
3
Ethical Hacking (A
Paperback – Import December
Comprehensive Beginner's
4 Alice Ybarr 2022
Guide to Learn and Master
Ethical Hacking)

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://youtu.be/OYsY5B9pqYU
2 https://youtu.be/jSsehESW37c
3 https://youtu.be/kpM4GopdXm0
4 https://youtu.be/kpM4GopdXm0
 SEMESTER S7

POWER QUALITY
PEEET751
Course Code CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type PE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the fundamental concepts of power quality, different power

quality issues and its mitigation methods.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Power quality phenomenon - Sources and effects of power quality
problems, Need for concern of Power quality
Types of power quality disturbances –Transients – classification and
origin, Short duration voltage variation – interruption, sag, swell, Long
1
duration voltage variation, voltage unbalance, waveform distortion -
9
notching, harmonics and voltage flicker
Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable Energy Systems –
operating conflicts
Harmonics - mechanism of harmonic generation, Triplen harmonics,
Harmonic sources – switching devices, arcing devices and saturable
devices, Effects of harmonics on power system equipment and loads –
transformers, capacitor banks, motors and telecommunication systems, 9
2
Effect of triplen harmonics on neutral current, line and phase voltages.
Harmonic analysis using Fourier series and Fourier transforms – simple
numerical problems
Harmonic indices (CF, DF, THD, TDD, TIF, DIN, C – message weights), 9
Displacement and total power factor Overview of power quality standards:

3 IEEE 519, IEEE 1433 and IEC 61000

Power quality Monitoring: Objectives and measurement issues, different
monitoring instruments – Power quality analyzer, harmonic spectrum
 analyzer, flicker meters

Mitigation of Power quality problems - Harmonic elimination - Design

simple problems and analysis of passive filters to reduce harmonic distortion
– demerits of passive filters – description of active filters - shunt, series,
hybrid filters, sag and swell correction using DVR Power quality

4 conditioners - DSTATCOM and UPQC - Configuration and working 9

Power factor correction – Single phase active power factor converter –
circuit schematic and control block diagram
Grounding and wiring– reasons for grounding – wiring and grounding
problems - solutions to these problems

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Identify the sources and effects of power quality problems. K2

CO2 Apply Fourier concepts for harmonic analysis. K3

CO3 Explain the important aspects of power quality monitoring. K2

CO4 Examine power quality mitigation techniques. K2

Discuss power quality issues in grid connected renewable energy K2

CO5
systems.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 1 2

CO2 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 2 1 2

CO5 3 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Electrical Power System R. C. Dugan, M. F. Me
1 McGraw-Hill 2012
Quality Granaghen, H. W. Beaty
2 Power Quality C. Sankaran CRC Press 2002
Understanding Power Quality
3 Math H. Bollen Wiley-IEEE Press 1999
Problems
Bhim Singh, Ambrish
Power Quality problems and John Wiley and Sons
4 Chandra and Kamal Al- 2015
mitigation techniques Ltd
Haddad
 SEMESTER S7

NONLINEAR CONTROL SYSTEMS

Course Code PEEET752 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the concept of nonlinear systems

2. To impart knowledge about different strategies adopted in the analysis of nonlinear systems
3. To familiarize with the design of different types of nonlinear controllers
SYLLABUS
Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to nonlinear systems:
Basic characteristics of nonlinear systems. Examples. State-space
representation of nonlinear systems. Classification of nonlinearities.

1 Phase plane analysis: Concept of phase plane, singular points. 10

Definition of stability – asymptotic stability, instability; Construction
using isocline method. Classification of equilibrium points; Systems with
multiple equilibria. Periodic orbits - limit cycles.
Lyapunov Stability Theory:
Lyapunov's direct method - Definite functions - Stability theorems; -
Variable gradient method – La-Salle theorems.
2 7
Stability of linear systems - Lyapunov equation for time-invariant
systems - Lyapunov’s linearization (indirect) method - Region of
attraction (concept only).
Frequency domain Analysis of Feedback systems:
Describing function method: Analysis through harmonic linearization-

3 Determination of describing function of nonlinearities. Application of 10

describing function for stability analysis of autonomous system with
single nonlinearity (relay, dead zone and saturation only).
 Feedback Stabilisation, Kalman-Yakubovitch-Popov lemma (Concept
only); Stability Analysis of feedback systems, Circle Criterion.
Nonlinear Control Design:
Lie Derivatives and Lie Brackets; Feedback linearization, Input state
linearization and input – output linearization of SISO systems. (3 hours)
4 9
Design via linearization - regulation via integral control; gain scheduling,
tracking.
Concepts of other nonlinear controllers – sliding mode, backstepping.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Analyse the qualitative behaviour of nonlinear systems about their
CO1 K3
equilibrium points.

CO2 Analyse the stability of nonlinear systems. K3

Analyse the behaviour of nonlinear systems using frequency domain K2

CO3
analysis.

CO4 Design feedback controller for nonlinear systems. K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping od Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 2 1 2 1 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Prentice - Hall
1 Nonlinear Systems Hassan K Khalil 2002
International (UK)

Applied Nonlinear
Jean-Jacques E. Slotine
2 Prentice-Hall, NJ 1991
and Weiping Li
Control
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Nonlinear Control Systems:
1 Alberto Isidori Springer-Verlag 1985
An Introduction

Nonlinear System Analysis,

2 M. Vidyasagar Prentice-Hall, India 1991
Stability and Control
 SEMESTER S7

DEEP LEARNING

Course Code PEEET753 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)
Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
Basic understanding of
Prerequisites (if any) probability theory, linear
algebra and machine
Course Type Theory
learning

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the building blocks used in deep learning like neural networks, deep neural
networks, convolutional neural networks and recurrent neural networks
2. To learn and understand various learning and optimization techniques such as Gradient
Descent, Adam
3. To solve a wide range of problems in Computer Vision and Natural Language Processing

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Neural Network:
Introduction to neural networks -Single layer perceptrons, Multi Layer
Perceptrons (MLPs), Activation functions - Sigmoid, Tanh, ReLU, Softmax,
Risk minimization, Loss function, Training MLPs with Backpropagation,
1 9
Practical issues in neural network training - The problem of Overfitting,
Vanishing and Exploding gradient problems, Difficulties in convergence,
Local and spurious Optima, Computational challenges. Applications of
neural networks
Deep Learning:
Introduction to Deep Learning, Deep Feed Forward network, Training deep

2 learning models, Optimization techniques - Gradient Descent (GD), GD with 9

momentum, Nesterov accelerated GD, Batch, Mini-batch and Stochastic GD,
AdaGrad, RMSProp, Adam
Convolutional Neural Network (CNN):
3 9
Introduction to CNN - Convolution and Pooling, Convolution and Pooling as
 an infinitely strong prior, variants of convolution functions, Efficient
convolution algorithms, Applications - Computer Vision
Recurrent Neural Network (RNN):

Introduction to RNN - Computational graphs, RNN design, Encoder-decoder

4 9
sequence to sequence architectures, Deep RNNs, Modern RNN - LSTM and
GRU, Applications - Natural Language Processing (NLP),

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

● 2 Questions from each ● Each question carries 9 marks.
module. ● Two questions will be given from each module, out
● Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks ● Each question can have a maximum of 3
subdivisions.
(8x3 =24 marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Illustrate the basic concepts of neural networks and its practical issues K2
Outline the standard regularization and optimization techniques for
CO2 deep neural network K2

Implement the foundation layers of convolutional neural networks,

CO3 K2
pooling and convolution
CO4 Implement sequence model using recurrent neural networks K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 3

CO2 3 3 2 3

CO3 3 3 2 3

CO4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Neural Networks and Deep
1 Learning Charu C. Aggarwal Springer 2018

Fundamentals of Deep
Learning: Designing Next- Nikhil Buduma and
2 Generation Machine O'Reilly Media 2017
Nicholas Locascio
Intelligence Algorithms

Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua

3 Deep Learning MIT Press
Bengio,Aaron Courville 2016
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Neural Networks and Deep http://neuralnetworksa
Michael Nielsen 2018
1 Learning nddeeplearning.com/

Neural Networks: A Classroom Tata McGraw-Hill

Satish Kumar 2014
2 Approach Education

Artificial Neural Networks Yegnanarayana, B PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd 2009

3

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/105/106105215/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106/106/106106184/
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106106201/
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/106106224/
 SEMESTER S7

COMPUTER VISION

Course Code PEEET754 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type PE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To develop the knowledge of various methods, algorithms and applications of Computer

Vision.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Review of image processing techniques: Digital filters, linear filters-
Homomorphic filtering, Point operators- Histogram, neighbourhood operators,
thresholding
Mathematical morphology, Binary shape analysis, Binary shape analysis,
1 9
Erosion, Dilation, Opening and Closing, Hit-or-Miss Transform
,connectedness, object labelling and counting, Boundary descriptors – Chain
codes. Properties of Binary Regions, Geometric Features, Statistical Shape
Properties
Feature Detection and Image Synthesis,Edge detection – edges, lines, active
contours, Split and merge, Mean shift and mode finding, Normalized cuts,
2 9
Graph cuts, energy- based methods- Cranny’s Algorithm, Corner detection,
Harris corner detection algorithm. Hough transform-Line and curve detection.
Shape from X - Shape from shading, Photometric stereo, Texture Occluding
contour detection. Motion Analysis- Regularization theory,Optical Flow:
3 9
brightness constancy equation, aperture problem, Horn-Shunck method, Lucas-
Kanade method. Structure from motion
Object recognition-Shape correspondence and shape matching PCA,SVM,
LDA, Bayes rule andML methods. Eigen faces,Face detection, Face
4 9
recognition, Application: Scene analysis Examples of real time applications: In-
vehicle vision system.
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Understand digital filtering operations for CV applications. K2
Apply basic morphological and boundary operators for Computer
CO2 K3
vision applications

CO3 Apply edge, corner detection algorithms to locate objects in an image. K3

CO4 Apply optical flow algorithms to detect moving objects in a video. K3
Analyse a given scene using appropriate computer vision algorithms to
CO5 detect/recognize objects and to implement it in real time practical K4
applications.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 2 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 2 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Computer and Machine Vision
Academic Press,
1 -Theory Algorithm and E. R .Davies 2012.
Practicalities
Computer Vision: Algorithms ISBN 978-1- 84882-
2 Richard Szeliski 2011
and Applications 935-0, Springer
Computer Vision: A Modern David Forsyth and Jean
3 Pearson India 2002
Approach Ponce

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Goodfellow, Bengio, and
1 Deep Learning, MIT Press,. 2006
Courville,
Mastering OpenCV with
Packt Publishing
2 Practical Computer Vision Daniel Lelis Baggio, et al 2012
Limited,
Projects
Computer Vision: Models, Cambridge
3 Simon J D Prince 2012
Learning, and Inference, University Press
Digital Image Processing and
4 R. J. Schalkoff John Wiley, 2004
Computer Vision,
Programming Computer Vision
with Python: Tools and
5 Jan Erik Solem, O'Reilly Media, 2012
algorithms for analyzing
images
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc19_cs58/preview
2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_cs93/preview
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc24_ee38/preview
 SEMESTER S7
COMPILER DESIGN

Course Code PEEOT751 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

PEEET414 Theory of
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type PE - Theory
Computation

Course Objectives

1. To provide a thorough understanding of the internals of Compiler Design, compiler parsing

techniques, intermediate machine representation and optimization.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to compilers – Analysis of the source program,
Phases of a compiler, Grouping of phases
Lexical Analysis-The role of Lexical Analyzer, Input Buffering, Specification
1
of Tokens using Regular Expressions, Finite Automata, Recognition of
9
Tokens. Syntax Analysis:
Grammers,Context-Free Grammars,Derivation trees and Parse, Ambiguity
Top-Down Parsing: Recursive Descent parsing, Predictive parsing, LL(1)
Grammars.
Bottom-Up Parsing:Shift Reduce parsing – Operator precedence parsing
2
(Concepts only)
9
LR parsing – Constructing SLR parsing tables, Constructing, Canonical LR
parsing tables and Constructing LALR parsing tables.
Syntax directed translation: Syntax directed definitions, Bottom- up evaluation
of S-attributed definitions, L- attributed definitions, Bottom-up evaluation of
inherited attributes.
3 9
Type Checking : Type systems, Specification of a simple type checker.
Run-Time Environments: Source Language issues, Storage organization,
Storage- allocation strategies.

4 Intermediate Code Generation (ICG): Intermediate languages – Graphical

9
 representations, Three- Address code, Quadruples, Triples
Code Optimization: Principal sources of optimization, Optimization of Basic
blocks
Code generation: Issues in the design of a code generator. The target machine,
A simple code generator.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the concepts and different phases of compilation with compile K2
time error handling
CO2 Represent language tokens using regular expressions, context free K2
grammar and finite automata .
CO3 Illustrate top down and bottom up parsers, and develop appropriate K3
parser to produce parse tree representation of the input.
CO4 Generate intermediate code for statements in high level language and K3
understand different storage allocation strategies.
CO5 Illustrate syntax directed translation schemes for a given context free K2
grammar..
CO6 Apply optimization techniques to intermediate code and generate K3
machine code for high level language program
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - 3

CO2 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - 3
3 2 2 1 1 - - - - - - 3
CO3

CO4 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2

CO5 3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2
3 2 2 1 - - - - - - - 2
CO6
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
2nd
1 Compilers-Principles, Aho A.V,Ravi Sethi and
Addison Wesley edition,20
Techniques and Tools D. Ullman
06
2nd
2 System Programming and McGraw Hill &
Operating Systems,Tata D. M.Dhamdhare, Company edition
,1996
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Indian
Compiler Construction – Cengage Learning
1 Kenneth C. Louden Edition,
Principles and Practice
2006
The Theory and Practice of English
Tremblay and Sorenson Tata McGraw Edition
2
Compiler Writing Hill & Company 1984
3rd
Introduction to the Theory of Cengage
3 Michael Sipser edition,2012
Computation Learning.

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_cs07/preview
2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_cs07/preview
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_cs07/preview
4 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_cs07/preview
 SEMESTER S7

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESIGN

Course Code PEEOT752 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

PCEET303,
Prerequisites (if any) PCEET501
Course Type PE - Theory

Course Objectives

1. To create awareness regarding electrical symbols, Indian Standard codes, Indian Electricity
acts and NEC norms

2. To enable students to design the various electrical installations with necessary precautions to
ensure life safety, risk prevention and continuous operation of the system

3. To help in energy-efficient electrical design in compliance with codes and regulations.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Awareness on IS Codes - IS 732, IS 3043, IS 2026- IS 3646-part 1 & 2 - IS
5216 part 1 & 2
Electricity supply code-2014, IE Act 1910, 2003, NEC
1
LT system wiring components, selection of cables, wires, switches, distribution
7
box, metering system, basics of star rating and labelling
Principle of operation of Fuse, MCB, MCCB, ELCB/RCCB, isolator.
General requirements for electrical installations- Residential/ Commercial/
High rise building, method of load survey for electrical installation, Diversity
factor
Sizing and selection of wires, MSB, SSB, DB and protection devices. Design
steps in electrical wiring, material estimation and development of single line
2
diagrams. Electrical CAD (optional). Pre-commissioning test applicable to
12
domestic installation
Lighting design calculations - Definitions of Luminous flux, Luminous
intensity, Illuminance. Illumination calculation, factors affecting Coefficients of
Utilisation (CoU) - Light Loss Factor (LLF).
 Design and Estimation the quantity of material required in Electrical
Installation for - Small residential building/Flat/Factory (Micro-Project)
Indoor and Outdoor substation- selection of transformer, switch gears and
protective devices, Procedure for HT connection, design and estimation the
quantity of material required for substations, Pre-commissioning tests for
transformers
Industrial loads, selection of starters, cable and switchgears, Power factor

3 improvement – kVAR calculation, correction methods

10
Design of MSB & SSB including Motor Control Centre (MCC) - Selection of
bus bars (CU & Al) and Switchgears
Specifications of LT Breakers and other LT panel components (Basics only)
Selection of industrial UG cables - Calculation of ampacity, voltage drop, short
circuit withstand capacity
Standby DG Systems with AMF panel – Essential protections. UPS system and
its design for residential application
Selection and installation of elevators and lifts
Earthing and Soil Resistivity calculation– Earth electrodes. Methods of earthing
- Plate earthing - Pipe earthing - Rod earthing. Methods of improving earth
4
resistance - Size of earth continuity conductor 7
Substation earthing and design (Theory only), substation lightning protection
(Theory only)
Solar PV Power generation – Design and installation of standalone and grid
interactive Solar PV system -Smart meter/Net meter

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Understand the Indian standards and code of practice for efficient and K2
effective energy usage with various electrical system design
components.
CO2 Design electrical wiring for residential and commercial consumers as K3
per IS codes and NEC and integration of PV systems
CO3 Design electrical installation for industrial consumers and high rise K3
buildings.
CO4 Analyse electrical system conditioning equipment and power backups. K4

CO5 Design various earthing methods and protection K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2 1 2 2 2 2

CO2 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 1 2

CO3 3 3 3 1 2 2 1 2

CO4 3 3 3 1 2 2 1 2

CO5 3 3 3 1 2 2 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
National Electrical Code, Bureau of Indian
1 Standards.
Bureau of Indian Standards.
IK International 2nd
2 Electrical Systems Design M. K. Giridharan Publishers, New edition,
Delhi 2016.
3 Electrical Design Estimating K. B. Raina, S. K. NEW AGE; Reprint
2010
Costing Bhattacharya edition
4 Residential Commercial and McGraw Hill
H. Joshi 2008
Industrial Systems Education

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Bureau of
National Lighting Code 2010,
1 Indian 2010
Bureau of Indian Standards.
Standards.

National Building Code of

Bureau of Indian
2 INDIA 2016 - Bureau of Indian 2016
Standards.
Standards.
Reprint
A Course in Electrical
S.K. Kataria & 2013
3 Installation Estimating and J. B. Gupta
Sons edition
Costing.
(2013)

Electrical estimating and Dhanpat Rai and

S. Singh, and R. D. Singh 1997
4 costing Co.
 SEMESTER S7

DESIGN OF SOLAR PV SYSTEMS

Course Code OEEET721 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4/3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type OE -Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce a solar PV system and its grid integration aspects.

2. To give insight to basic knowhow for the implementation of Solar PV system
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction - Basic Concept of Energy -Source of Solar Energy -Formation
of the Atmosphere - Solar Spectrum. Solar Constant -Air Mass -Solar Time-
Sun‒Earth Angles-Solar Radiation-Instruments to Measure Solar Radiation-
Pyrheliometer –Pyranometer - Sunshine Recorder -Solar Radiation on a
1
Horizontal Surface - Extra-terrestrial Region.- Terrestrial Region -Solar
9
Radiation on an Inclined Surface -Conversion Factors -Total Solar Radiation
on an Inclined/Tilted Surface -Monthly Average Daily Solar Radiation on
Inclined Surfaces .
Solar Thermal system-Principle of Conversion of Solar Radiation into Heat,
–Solar thermal collectors –General description and characteristics –Flat plate
collectors –Heat transfer processes –Solar concentrators (parabolic trough,

2 parabolic dish, Central Tower Collector) – performance evaluation.

Applications -Solar heating system, Air conditioning and Refrigeration 9
system, Pumping system, solar cooker, Solar Furnace, Solar Greenhouse -
Design of solar water heater
Solar PV Systems-Introduction -Fundamentals of Semiconductor and Solar
3 9
Cells - Photovoltaic Effect -Solar Cell (Photovoltaic) Materials - Basic
 Parameters of the Solar Cell - Generation of Solar Cell (Photovoltaic)
Materials-.Photovoltaic (PV) Module and PV Array - Single-Crystal Solar
Cell Module, Thin-Film PV Modules, III–V Single Junction and
Multifunction PV Modules-Emerging and New PV Systems -Packing Factor
of the PV Module - Efficiency of the PV Module -Energy Balance Equations
for PV Modules -Series and Parallel Combination of PV Modules.- Effect of
shadowing-MPPT Techniques-P&O , incremental conductance method-
Maximum Power Point Tracker (MPPT) using buck-boost converter.
Solar PV Systems –stand-alone and grid connected -Design steps for a
Stand-Alone system – Storage batteries and Ultra capacitors. Design PV
powered DC fan and pump without battery-Design of Standalone System

4 with Battery and AC or DC Load.

9
Life cycle costing, Growth models, Annual payment and present worth
factor, payback period, LCC with examples. Introduction to simulation
software for solar PV system design

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub 60
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Explain the basics of solar energy conversion systems. K1
CO2 Design a standalone PV system. K3
CO3 Demonstrate the operation of a grid interactive PV system. K2

CO4 Utilize life cycle cost analysis in the planning of Solar PV System K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 1

CO2 3 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 2 2

CO4 3 3 2 1 2 1 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Solar Photovoltaics:
1 Fundamentals, Technologies Chetan Singh Solanki PHI 3rd Edition
And Applications
Solar Energy-Fundamentals,
2 Design, Modelling and G.N. Tiwari: Narosa Publishers 2002
Applications
Grid Integration of Solar
3 D.P. Kothari, M Jamil. CRC Press 2018
Photovoltaic Systems,
Solar Photovoltaics:
4 Fundamentals, Technologies Chetan Singh Solanki PHI 3rd Edition
And Applications
 SEMESTER S7
HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES

Course Code OEEET722 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type OE -Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Familiarise with the hybrid and electric vehicles and its drive train topologies
2. Discuss the propulsion unit for electric vehicles
3. Choose proper energy storage system for electric vehicles.
4. Selection of battery management strategy and study of various communication protocols for
EV
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Hybrid and Electric Vehicles: History of hybrid and
electric vehicles, Social and environmental importance of hybrid and electric
vehicles.

Vehicle Dynamics & Load Forces: mathematical models to describe

vehicle performance, vehicle load forces (concept only): aerodynamic drag
,rolling resistance , grading resistance, vehicle acceleration, calculation of
motor power from traction torque.
1 10
Hybrid Electric Drive-trains: Basic concept of hybrid traction, introduction
to various hybrid drive-train topologies (Block diagram only), power flow
control in various hybrid drive-train topologies (Block diagram only).

Electric Drive-trains: Basic concept of electric traction, introduction to

various electric drive-train topologies (Block diagram only), power flow
control in electric drive-train topologies (Block diagram only).

2 Electric Drives: Block diagram, Introduction to electric motors used in 8

 hybrid and electric vehicles.

DC Motor Drives: Introduction, Configuration and control of separately

excited DC motors Motoring using a PM DC Machine - DC motor drive
using DC-DC converter - Generating/Braking using a PM DC Machine
(concept only)

Induction Motor Drives: Introduction, Speed control of induction motor,

V/f control of induction motor (block diagram only)

Battery based energy storage systems: Types of battery-battery

parameters-units of battery energy storage - capacity rate, - cell voltage -
specific energy - cycle life - self-discharge- static battery equivalent circuit
model - series-parallel battery pack equivalent circuits

Other storage topologies (Basics only): Fuel Cell based energy storage
3 10
systems- Supercapacitors- flywheel- Hybridization of different energy
storage devices

Types of charging stations (Basics only)- AC Level 1 & 2, DC - Level 3

(block diagram only) -Types of Connectors - CHAdeMO, CCS Type1 and 2,
GB/T - PIN diagrams and differences
Battery management system: Introduction to energy management
strategies, Classification of Battery management system (concept only)

Vehicle Communication protocols: Need & requirements - Functions of

Control Pilot (CP) and Proximity Pilot (PP) pins, Communication Protocols -
4 8
CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY (Basics only)- Power line communication (PLC) in
EV

Autonomous Vehicles: Levels of automation, significance & effects of

automation in vehicles
 Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)

Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:
Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Familiarise with the hybrid and electric vehicles and its drive train
CO1 K2
topologies
CO2 Discuss the propulsion unit for electric vehicles K3
CO3 Choose proper energy storage system for electric vehicles K3
Selection of battery management strategy and study of various
CO4 K3
communication protocols for EV
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3

CO4 3 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Electric and Hybrid Vehicles:
1 Iqbal Hussein CRC Press, 2003
Design Fundamentals, 2003
Elementary Concepts of Power CRC Press, Taylor &
2 K Sundareswaran,
Electronic Drives: Francis Group
3 Electric Drives Krishnan PHA

Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Electrical Engineering –
1 Introduction to Hybrid and NPTEL (notes)
Electric Vehicles
 SEMESTER S7

INTRODUCTION TO ENERGY STORAGE SYSTEMS

Course Code OEEET723 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week 3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60

(L: T:P: R)
3
Credits Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.
NIL
Prerequisites (if any) Course Type OE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce the importance and application of energy storage systems.

2. To familiarize with different energy storage technologies.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Need and role of energy storage systems in power system, General
considerations, Energy and power balance in a storage unit,
Mathematical model of storage system: modelling of power
transformation system (PTS)-Central store (CS) and charge–discharge
1 9
control system (CDCS), Econometric model of storage system.
Thermal energy: General considerations -Storage media- Containment-
Thermal energy storage in a power plant, Potential energy: Pumped hydro-
Compressed Air.
Kinetic energy: Mechanical- Flywheel, Power to Gas: Hydrogen- Synthetic
methane. Electro chemical energy: Batteries-Battery parameters: C-rating–
SoC – DoD -Specific Energy- Specific power (numerical examples), Fuel 9
2
cells, Electrostatic energy (Super Capacitors), Electromagnetic energy
(Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage), Comparative analysis,
Environmental impacts of different technologies.
Types of renewable energy sources: Wave - Wind – Tidal – Hydroelectric -
Solar thermal technologies and Photovoltaics, Storage role in isolated power
3 9
systems with renewable power sources, Storage role in an integrated power
system with grid-connected renewable power sources.
 Smart grid, Smart micro grid, Smart house, Mobile storage system:
Electric vehicles – Grid to Vehicle (G2V)-Vehicle to Grid (V2G),
9
Management and control hierarchy of storage systems.
4
Aggregating energy storage systems and distributed generation (Virtual
Power Plant Energy Management with storage systems), Battery SCADA,
Hybrid energy storage systems: configurations and applications.
Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)
Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)
At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Identify the role of energy storage in power systems. K3
Classify thermal, kinetic and potential energy storage systems and their K3
CO2
applications.
Compare electrochemical, electrostatic and electromagnetic storage K3
CO3
technologies.
CO4 Illustrate energy storage technology in renewable energy integration. K2

CO5 Summarise energy storage technology applications for smart grids. K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 1 1
CO3 3 1 1
CO4 3 1 1
CO5 3 1 1
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
TheInstitution of
Second
Energy Storage for Power Engineering and
1 A.G.Ter- Gazarian Edition,
Systems Technology (IET)
2011
Publication, UK,
Francisco Díaz-
Energy Storagein Power
Systems González, Andreas
2 Wiley Publication 2016.
Sumper, Oriol Gomis-
Bellmunt
TheInstitution of
Second
Energy Storage for Power Engineering and
1 A.G.Ter- Gazarian Edition,
Systems Technology (IET)
2011
Publication, UK,
Francisco Díaz-
Energy Storagein Power
Systems González, Andreas
2 Wiley Publication 2016.
Sumper, Oriol Gomis-
Bellmunt
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Electricity Energy Storage Technical
Electric Power
Technology Options: A White Update,
1 D. Rastler Research Institute
Paper Primer on Applications, December
(USA)
Costs, and Benefits 2010
The Role of Energy Storage Paul Denholm, Erik Ela, National Renewable
January
2 with Renewable Electricity Brendan Kirby and Energy Laboratory
2010
Generation Michael Milligan (NREL)
Electrical energy management
of virtual power plants in
P. Nezamabadi and G. B. IEEE Power
3 distribution networks with 2011
Gharehpetian Distribution Conferenc
renewable energy resources and
energy storage systems

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=o6Afp-
1 MI_tQ&list=PLLy_2iUCG87AjWoOk0A3y4hpGQVTdtl6G&index=12 (NPTEL lecture IIT
Roorkee)
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yar51GJVqgg (NPTEL lecture IIT Guwahati)
3 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=frWxC5KL8kE (NPTEL lecture IIT Guwahati)
4 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AZIS_MCw8Qc (NPTEL lecture IIT Kanpur)
SEMESTER 8
ELECTRICAL AND COMPUTER
ENGINEERING
 SEMESTER S8

SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES

Course Code PEEET861 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type PE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce various advancements in the area of smart grid.

2. To introduce distributed energy resources and micro-grid.
3. To introduce cloud computing, cyber security and power quality issues in smart grids.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Smart Grid: Evolution of electric grid, Definitions, Need
for smart grid, Smart grid drivers, Functions of smart grid, Opportunities and
barriers of smart grid, Difference between conventional grid and smart grid,
Concept of resilient and self- healing grid. Components and architecture,
Inter-operability, Impacts of smart grid on system reliability, Present
development and international policies in smart grid, Smart grid standards.
1 9
Information and Communication Technology in Smart Grid: Wired and
wireless communication -radio mesh, ZIGBEE, 3G, 4G and 5G. Digital
PLC, DSL, Wi-Max, LAN, NAN, HAN, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low
Energy (BLE), Li-Fi. Communication Protocols in Smart grid, Introduction
to IEC 61850 standard and benefits, IEC Generic Object-Oriented Substation
Event - GOOSE, Substation model.
Smart grid Technologies Part I: Introduction to smart meters, Electricity
tariff, Real Time Pricing- Automatic Meter Reading (AMR) - System,
Services and Functions, Components of AMR Systems, Advanced Metering
2 9
Infrastructure (AMI). Plug in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV), Vehicle to
Grid (V2G), Grid to Vehicle (G2V), Smart Sensors, Smart energy efficient
end use devices, Home & Building Automation. Intelligent Electronic
 Devices (IED) and their application for monitoring & protection: Digital
Fault Recorder (DFR), Digital Protective Relay (DPR), Circuit Breaker
Monitor (CBM), Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU), Standards for PMU.
Time synchronization techniques, Wide Area Monitoring System (WAMS),
control and protection systems (Architecture, components of WAMS, and
applications: Voltage stability assessment, frequency stability assessment,
power oscillation assessment, communication needs of WAMS, remedial
action scheme).
Smart grid Technologies Part II: Smart substations, Substation
automation, Feeder automation, Fault detection, Isolation, and Service
Restoration (FDISR), Geographic Information System (GIS), Outage
Management System (OMS). Introduction to Smart distributed energy
3 9
resources and their grid integration, Smart inverters, Concepts of microgrid,
Need and application of microgrid – Energy Management- Role of
technology in demand response- Demand side management, Demand side
Ancillary Services, Dynamic line rating.
Cloud computing in smart grid: Private, Public and hybrid cloud. Types of
cloud computing services- Software as a Service (SaaS), Platform as a
service (PaaS), Infrastructure as a service (IaaS), Data as a service (DaaS),
Cloud architecture for smart grid.

4 Cyber Security - Cyber security challenges and solutions in smart grid, 9

Cyber security risk assessment, Security index computation.
Power Quality Management in Smart Grid- Fundamentals, Power Quality
(PQ) & Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) in smart grid, Power quality
conditioners for smart grid. Case study of smart grid.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Internal
Assignment/
Attendance Examination-1 Examination- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  Each question carries 9 marks.
module.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub
divisions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the basic concept of distributed energy resources, micro-grid and
CO1 K2
smart grid
Choose appropriate Information and Communication Technology (ICT) in
CO2 K2
smart grid
CO3 Select infrastructure and technologies for consumer domain of smart grid K2
Select infrastructure and technologies for smart substation and distribution
CO4 K2
automation
Formulate cloud computing infrastructure for smart grid considering cyber
CO5 K3
security
CO6 Categorize power quality issues and appraise it in smart grid context K2
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 2

CO2 3 3 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 3 3

CO6 3 3 3 3 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Smart Grid Infrastructure
1 Stuart Borlase CRC Press 2nd edition
Technology and Solutions
Smart Grid: Fundamentals of
2 James Momoh Wiley 2012
Design and Analysis
Institution of
Microgrids and Active
3 S. Chowdhury Engineering and 2009
Distribution Networks
Technology
Janaka Ekanayake,
Kythira Liyanage,
Smart Grids Technology and
4 Jianzhong Wu, Akihiko Wiley 2012
Applications
Yokohama, Nick
Jenkins-
Janaka Ekanayake,
Smart Grids Technology and Kythira Liyanage,
5 Wiley 2012
Applications Jianzhong Wu, Akihiko
Yokohama, Nick Jenkins
Cybersecurity for the Electric
Barker, Preston, Price, Nova Science
6 Smart Grid: Elements and 2012
Rudy F Publishers Inc
Considerations
 SEMESTER S8

HVDC AND FACTS

Course Code PEEET862 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) PCEET403 Course Type PE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To introduce HVDC concepts and analysis of HVDC systems.

2. To provide a detailed study of FACTS devices.
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to HVDC System: Comparison of AC and DC Transmission -
Types of HVDC system - Current Source Converters - Analysis without and
with overlap period. Voltage Source Converters (VSC) - VSC with AC cur-
rent control and VSC with AC voltage control
1 9
HVDC Controls - Functions of HVDC Controls - Equivalent circuit for a
two terminal DC Link - Control Basics for a two terminal DC Link - Current
Margin Control Method - Current Control at the Rectifier - Inverter Extinc-
tion Angle Control - Hierarchy of Controls
Introduction to FACTS: Power flow in Power Systems – Voltage regula-
tion and reactive power flow control in Power Systems - Power flow control
-Constraints of maximum transmission line loading - Needs and emergence
2
of FACTS - Types of FACTS controllers-Advantages and disadvantages
9
Transmission line compensation- Uncompensated line -shunt compensation -
Series compensation -Phase angle control.
Shunt and Series Facts Devices: Static shunt Compensator - Objectives of
shunt compensations - Variable impedance type VAR Generators -TCR,

3 TSR, TSC, FC-TCR (Principle of operation and schematic) and - STAT- 9

COM (Principle of operation and schematic). Static Series compensator -
Objectives of series compensations-Variable impedance type series compen-
 sators - GCSC. TCSC, TSSC (Principle of operation and schematic)
Switching converter type Series Compensators-(SSSC) (Principle of opera-
tion and schematic)
UPFC AND IPFC: Unified Power Flow Controller: Circuit Arrangement,
Operation of UPFC- Basic principle of P and Q control- independent real and
reactive power flow control- Applications Introduction to interline power
4
flow controller (IPFC) (Principle of operation and schematic) Thyristor con- 9
trolled Voltage and Phase angle Regulators (Principle of operation and
schematic)

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Examina- Internal Examina-

Assignment/
Attendance tion-1 tion- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each mod-  Each question carries 9 marks.
ule.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divi-
sions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)
At the end of the course students should be able to:
Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Analyse current source and voltage source converters for HVDC sys- K4
CO1
tems
CO2 Describe the control schemes for HVDC systems K2

CO3 Explain the need for FACTS devices K2

CO4 Classify reactive power compensators in power system K2

Interpret series and shunt connected FACTS devices for power system K2
CO5
applications
CO6 Explain the dynamic interconnection mechanisms of FACTS devices K2

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 3 2

CO2 3 3 2

CO3 3 3 2

CO4 3 3 2

CO5 3 3 2

CO6 3 3 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Publish- Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
er and Year
1 HVDC and FACTS Controllers Vijay K Sood Springer 2004
N.G. Hingorani and
2 Understanding FACTS IEEE Press 2000
L.Gyugyi
3 High Voltage DC Transmission K.R.Padiyar Wiley 1993
FACTS Controllers in Power New age international
4 K.R.Padiyar 2007
Transmission and distribution Publishers
Flexible AC Transmission sys-
5 Y.H. Song and A.T.Jones IEEE Press 1999
tems (FACTS)
Reactive Power control in
6 T.J.E. Miller John Wiley 1982
Power systems
 SEMESTER S8
MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS

Course Code PEEET863 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type PE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise mechatronic systems with fundamental knowledge in sensors and actuators

achieve conceptual understanding of mechatronic systems
2. To enhance the fundamental knowledge in microprocessors and microcontrollers
3. To learn the fundamentals of system models and controllers
4. To understand control actions such as Proportional, derivative and integral and study its sig-
nificance in industrial applications
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Mechatronics: Introduction, Examples of Mechatronic sys-
tems, Electric circuits and components, Semiconductor Electronics, Transis-
tor Applications
Sensors and transducers: Performance terminology of sensors, Displacement,

1 Position & Proximity Sensors-I, Displacement, Position & Proximity Sen- 9

sors-II,
Force, Fluid pressure, Liquid flow sensors, temperature, light sensor, Accel-
eration and Vibration measurement, Semiconductor sensor and MEMS,
SAW
Actuators and mechanisms: Mechanical Actuation System, Hydraulic &
Pneumatic Actuation System, Electrical Actuation System-I, Electrical Actu-
ation System-II, Data Presentation system
2 10
Signal conditioning: Introduction to signal processing & Op-Amp, Op-Amp
as signal conditioner, Analogue to Digital Converter, Digital to Analogue
Converter, Artificial intelligence

3 Microprocessors and microcontrollers: Digital circuits-I, Digital circuits-II,

 Microprocessor Micro Controller, Programming of Microcontrollers Model-
ing and system response: Mechanical system model, Electrical system mod- 10
el, Fluid system model, Dynamic response of systems, Transfer function and
frequency response.
Closed loop controllers: P, I, PID Controllers, Digital Controllers, Program

4 Logic Controllers, Input/output & Communication systems, Fault findings 7

Mechatronics designs, examples and case studies

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Examina- Internal Examina-

Assignment/
Attendance tion-1 tion- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each mod-  Each question carries 9 marks.
ule.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divi-
sions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Comprehend the importance of sensors and actuators with application
CO1 K2
to mechatronic systems
CO2 Identify actuator mechanisms and signal conditioning processes K2
Select microprocessors and microcontrollers for the implementation in
CO3 K2
mechatronic system
CO4 Analyse the models and responses of different systems K3
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 1

CO2 3 1 1

CO3 3 1 1

CO4 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher and
Year
4th Edi-
Mechatronics: Electronic Con-
1 trol Systems in Mechanical and W. Bolton Pearson Education tion
Electrical Engineering 2010

Michael B. McGraw-Hill Series in

2 Introduction to Mechatronics Mechanical Engineering 2003
Histand, David G. Al-
and Measurement Systems
ciatore
Shetty, Devdas, and
3 Mechatronics system design. 2010.
CL-Engineering Richard A. Kolk.
4 Mechatronics: an introduction., Bishop, Robert H. CRC Press 2017.
Intelligent Mechatronic Sys- R. Merzouki, A. K. Sa-
5 tems: Modeling, Control and mantaray, P. M. Pathak, Springer, London 2003
Diagnosis B. Ould Bouamama
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107298/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107298/
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107298/
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107298/
 SEMESTER S8
ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION

Course Code PEEET864 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) GYEST104, PBEET304 Course Type PE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To acquire knowledge about analog and digital communication systems

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Analog Communication:
Introduction to communication systems, Classification of channels, Need for
modulation. Amplitude modulation: Equation and frequency spectrum of

1 AM signal, Double-side band suppressed carrier (DSB-SC) modulation, Sin-

gle sideband modulation (SSB), comparison of spectrum, power and effi- 9
ciency of all the three variants, Amplitude modulator circuits -balanced
modulator, AM demodulators – Envelope detector.
Angle Modulation:
Frequency and phase modulation, Narrow and wide band FM and their spec-
tra, Modulation and demodulation techniques for FM, pre-emphasis and de-
2
emphasis, FM transmitter and receiver, Noise in receivers, Noise figures,
9
Performance of analog modulation schemes in AWGN: SNR and figure of
merit for different schemes.
Digital baseband communication:
Elements of digital communication system. Sources, channels and receivers,
Sampling and Reconstruction of Analog Signals: Nyquist Sampling Theo-
3 9
rem, Ideal Reconstruction Filter, Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM), Time
division multiplexing with PAM, Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), A-law and
mu-law quantization.
Digital bandpass communication:
4
Digital bandpass communication system, Bandpass modulation techniques: 9
 Amplitude shift keying, Phase shift keying, Frequency shift keying, Methods
of generation and detection, Signal constellations, M-ary digital modulation
schemes, Quadrature phase shift keying, Minimum shift keying, Quadrature
amplitude modulation.
Course Assessment Method
(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Examina- Internal Examina-

Assignment/
Attendance tion-1 tion- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each mod-  Each question carries 9 marks.
ule.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divi-
sions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)
At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Explain the working of Amplitude modulator and demodulator circuits using K2
CO1
mathematical relations.
Explain the characteristics of various analog modulation schemes in terms of K3
CO2
spectra, power and efficiency.

CO3 Understand the various processing blocks of a digital communication system. K2

CO4 Apply the knowledge of digital modulation in digital transmission. K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create
 CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3

CO2 3 2

CO3 3 1

CO4 3 2 1
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Edition and
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
Year
Kennedy’s Electronic Commu- Kennedy, Davis and 6th Edition,
1 Tata McGraw Hill
nication Systems Prasanna 2018
Electronic Communication 5th edition,
2 Systems – Fundamentals Wayne Tomasi Pearson 2008
through Advanced
Communication Systems Simon Haykin and Mi- 5th Edi-
3 Wiley
chael Mohre tion,2021
Principles of Communication 4th edition,
4 Taub& Schilling McGraw-Hill
Systems 2017

Reference Books
Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
and Year

Rodger E. Ziemer& Wil- 7the edi-

1 Principles of Communications Wiley
liam H. Tranter tion, 2014

2nd
2 Communication System J. G. Proakis and M.
Pearson Education Edition,
Engineering Salehi
2018.
Digital and Analog Communi- 8th edition,
3 Leon W. Couch Prentice Hall
cation Systems 2012
Modern Digital and Analog Oxford University 4th edition,
4 B. P. Lathi, Zhi Ding
Communication Systems Press 2011
 SEMESTER S8
INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTICS

Course Code OEEET831 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type OE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise mechatronic systems with fundamental knowledge in sensors and actuators

achieve conceptual understanding of mechatronic systems
2. To enhance the fundamental knowledge in microprocessors and microcontrollers
3. To learn the fundamentals of system models and controllers
4. To understand control actions such as Proportional, derivative and integral and study its sig-
nificance in industrial applications
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Definitions- Robots, Robotics; Types of Robots- Manipulators, Mobile Ro-
bots-wheeled & Legged Robots, Aerial Robots; Anatomy of a robotic ma-
nipulator-links, joints, actuators, sensors, controller; open kinematic vs
closed kinematic chain; degrees of freedom; Robot considerations for an ap-
1 7
plication- number of axes, work volume, capacity & speed, stroke &reach,
Repeatability, Precision and Accuracy, Operating environment, point to
point control or continuous path control

Sensors and Actuators

Sensor classification- touch, force, proximity, vision sensors.
Internal sensors-Position sensors, velocity sensors, acceleration sensors,
Force sensors; External sensors-contact type, noncontact type

2 Actuators for robots- classification-Electric, Hydraulic, Pneumatic actuators; 10

their advantages and disadvantages; Electric actuators- Stepper motors, DC
motors, DC servo motors and their drivers, AC motors, Linear actuators, se-
lection of motors
Robotic configurations and end effectors Robot configurations-PPP, RPP,
 RRP, RRR; features of SCARA, PUMA Robots; Classification of robots
based on motion control methods and drive technologies; 3R concurrent
wrist;
Classification of End effectors - mechanical grippers, special tools, Magnetic
grippers, Vacuum grippers, adhesive grippers, Active and passive grippers,
selection and design considerations of grippers in robot.
Kinematics and Motion Planning
Robot Coordinate Systems- Fundamental and composite rotations, homoge-
neous co-ordinates and transformations, Kinematic parameters, D-H repre-
sentation, Direct Kinematics. The Arm equation- forward Kinematic analysis
3 9
of a typical robots upto 3 DOF.
Motion Planning- joint space trajectory planning-cubic polynomial, linear
trajectory with parabolic blends; Cartesian space planning, Point to point vs
continuous path planning.
Dynamics and Control of Robots
Building of a servo controlled robot – 1R two link chain, construction of link
and joint and mounting of encoder, actuator, etc.
Dynamics- Dynamic model of a robot using Lagrange’s equation, dynamic
modelling of 1DOF robot, including motor and gearbox, 2R planar manipu-
4 lator. 9
Control Techniques- Transfer function and state space representation, Per-
formance and stability of feedback control, PID control of a single link ma-
nipulator, selection of PID controller gains; nonlinear nature of manipulators,
and need for nonlinear control techniques.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Examina- Internal Examina-

Assignment/
Attendance tion-1 tion- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40
 End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each mod-  Each question carries 9 marks.
ule.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divi-
sions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
CO1 Familiarise with anatomy, specifications and applications of Robots K2
CO2 Choose the appropriate sensors and actuators for robots K2
Choose appropriate Robotic configuration and gripper for a particular
CO3 K2
application
CO4 Obtain kinematic model of robotic manipulators K3

CO5 Plan trajectories in joint space and Cartesian space K3

Develop dynamic model and design the controller for robotic manipu-
CO6 K3
lators
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 2 1 3
CO2 2 1 3
CO3 2 1 3
CO4 3 2 2 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation
 Text Books
Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
and Year
McGraw Hill Education
1 Introduction to Robotics S K Saha 2014
(India) Private Limited
Fundamentals of robotics –
2 Robert. J. Schilling Prentice Hall of India 1996.
Analysis and control
R K Mittal and I J Tata McGraw Hill, New
3 Robotics and Control 2003
Nagrath Delhi
Introduction to Robotics: Me- 4th Edition,
4 John. J. Craig Pearson Education Asia
chanics and control 2018
Robotics-Fundamental concepts
5 Ashitava Ghosal Oxford University press. 2006
and analysis
Robotics Technology and Flexi- McGraw-Hill Education Second
6 S. R. Deb
ble Automation LLC Edition,

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/107/106/107106090/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/107/106/107106090/
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/107/106/107106090/
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/107/106/107106090/
 SEMESTER S8

PLC AND AUTOMATION

Course Code OEEET832 CIE Marks 40
Teaching Hours/Week 3:0:1:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 4 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

Prerequisites (if any) None Course Type Theory

Course Objectives:

1. Learn the roles, architectures, and interfacing techniques of computer-based measurement and
control systems, including HMI and hardware integration.
2. Gain hands-on experience with PLC programming and simulation, and understand the
functionalities and interfacing of Distributed Control Systems for process control.

SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to computer based control system -Role of computers in
measurement and (process) control Basic components of computer based
measurement and control systems Architecture – computer based process
control system –Centralised, Distributed and Hierarchical. Human Machine

1 Interface (HMI) Hardware for computer based process control system, 9

Interfacing computer system with process.
Architecture of DDC, SCADA and DCS.
Programmable logic Controller (PLC): Introduction, Evolution, Relay VS
PLC VS Computer
PLC- Hardware and Internal Architecture-Input –output devices .Basics of
Ladder Programming, on/off instructions, internal relay, jump instructions,
2 9
data handling instruction, data manipulation instructions, Arithmetic and
Comparison ,PID and other important instructions
Timers and Counters in PLC. Problems. Design Development and
3 9
Simulation of PLC Programme Program on Temperature control Valve
 sequencing, Conveyor belt control and Control of a process.
PLC Installation, trouble shooting and maintenance, Design of Alarms and
Interlocks, Networks of PLC
Distributed Control System- DCS - Evolution– Various Architectures –
Comparison – Local control unit
DCS -LCU Languages-Process interfacing issues-communication facilities-
Operator interface-Low level and High level Operator interface- Displays -

4 Engineering interfaces – Low level and high level engineering interfaces – 9

Factors to be considered in selecting DCS – Other key issues in DCS –
Packaging and Power system issues.

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Attendance Internal Ex Evaluate Analyse Total

5 15 10 10 40

Criteria for Evaluation (Evaluate and Analyse): 20 marks

Micro projects on automation using PLC and DCS for student group comprising of 3 students.
Report – 5 marks
Working Model – 15 Marks

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE):

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each  2 questions will be given from each
module. module, out of which 1 question should be
 Total of 8 Questions, answered.
each carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 60
sub divisions.
 Each question carries 9 marks.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Understand the basic architecture and components of computer-based
CO1 K2
measurement and control systems.
Understand the human-machine interfaces (HMI) and learn the
CO2 hardware and interfacing techniques needed to integrate computer K2
systems with process controls.
Create and troubleshoot PLC programs using ladder logic for various
CO3 K5
applications.
Understand and apply the architecture and interfaces of Distributed
CO4 K2
Control Systems in various process control settings.
Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3

CO2 3

CO3 3 2

CO4 3
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Instrument Engineer’s
1 B G Liptak CRC Press 4th edtion
Handbook – Process Control,
Understanding Distributed 1st edition
2 Samel M. Herb ISA Publication
Processor Systems for Control, 1999
Programmable Logic
John W.Webb & Ronald
3 Controllers – Principles and PHI 5th edition
A. Reiss,
Applications.
Computer Control of Processes, Alpha Science 1st edition
4 M. Chidambaram
International Ltd 2002
 Reference Books
Name of the Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s
Publisher and Year
Process Software and Digital
1 B G Liptak CRC 3rd edition
Networks, CRC Press.
Programmable Logic
John R. Hackworth &
Controllers – Programming 1st edition
2 Frederick D. Hackworth Pearson
Methods and Applications, 2003
Jr
Pearson Education.

Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)

Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_me67/preview
2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_me67/preview
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_me67/preview
4 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc21_me67/preview
 SEMESTER S8

MECHATRONIC SYSTEMS AND CONTROL

Course Code OEEET833 CIE Marks 40

Teaching Hours/Week
3:0:0:0 ESE Marks 60
(L: T:P: R)

Credits 3 Exam Hours 2 Hrs. 30 Min.

None/
Prerequisites (if any) (Course code) Course Type OE - Theory

Course Objectives:

1. To familiarise mechatronic systems with fundamental knowledge in sensors and actuators

achieve conceptual understanding of mechatronic systems
2. To enhance the fundamental knowledge in microprocessors and microcontrollers
3. To learn the fundamentals of system models and controllers
4. To understand control actions such as Proportional, derivative and integral and study its sig-
nificance in industrial applications
SYLLABUS

Module Contact
Syllabus Description
No. Hours
Introduction to Mechatronics: Introduction, Examples of Mechatronic sys-
tems, Electric circuits and components, Semiconductor Electronics, Transis-
tor Applications
Sensors and transducers: Performance terminology of sensors, Displacement,

1 Position & Proximity Sensors-I, Displacement, Position & Proximity Sen- 9

sors-II,
Force, Fluid pressure, Liquid flow sensors, temperature, light sensor, Accel-
eration and Vibration measurement, Semiconductor sensor and MEMS,
SAW
Actuators and mechanisms: Mechanical Actuation System, Hydraulic &
Pneumatic Actuation System, Electrical Actuation System-I, Electrical Actu-
ation System-II, Data Presentation system
2 10
Signal conditioning: Introduction to signal processing & Op-Amp, Op-Amp
as signal conditioner, Analogue to Digital Converter, Digital to Analogue
Converter, Artificial intelligence
 Microprocessors and microcontrollers: Digital circuits-I, Digital circuits-II,
Microprocessor Micro Controller, Programming of Microcontrollers Model-

3 ing and system response: Mechanical system model, Electrical system mod- 10
el, Fluid system model, Dynamic response of systems, Transfer function and
frequency response.
Closed loop controllers: P, I, PID Controllers, Digital Controllers, Program

4 Logic Controllers, Input/output & Communication systems, Fault findings 7

Mechatronics designs and case studies

Course Assessment Method

(CIE: 40 marks, ESE: 60 marks)

Continuous Internal Evaluation Marks (CIE):

Internal Examina- Internal Examina-

Assignment/
Attendance tion-1 tion- 2 Total
Microproject
(Written) (Written)

5 15 10 10 40

End Semester Examination Marks (ESE)

In Part A, all questions need to be answered and in Part B, each student can choose any one
full question out of two questions

Part A Part B Total

 2 Questions from each mod-  Each question carries 9 marks.
ule.  Two questions will be given from each module, out
 Total of 8 Questions, each of which 1 question should be answered.
60
carrying 3 marks  Each question can have a maximum of 3 sub divi-
sions.
(8x3 =24marks) (4x9 = 36 marks)
 Course Outcomes (COs)

At the end of the course students should be able to:

Bloom’s
Course Outcome Knowledge
Level (KL)
Comprehend the importance of sensors and actuators with application
CO1 K2
to mechatronic systems

CO2 Identify actuator mechanisms and signal conditioning processes K2

Select microprocessors and microcontrollers for the implementation in
CO3 K2
mechatronic system

CO4 Analyse the models and responses of different systems K3

Note: K1- Remember, K2- Understand, K3- Apply, K4- Analyse, K5- Evaluate, K6- Create

CO-PO Mapping Table (Mapping of Course Outcomes to Program Outcomes)

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO1 3 1 1

CO2 3 1 1

CO3 3 1 1

CO4 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
Note: 1: Slight (Low), 2: Moderate (Medium), 3: Substantial (High), -: No Correlation

Text Books
Edition
Sl. No Title of the Book Name of the Author/s Name of the Publisher
and Year
Mechatronics: Electronic Con- 4th Edition
1 trol Systems in Mechanical and W. Bolton Pearson Education
2010
Electrical Engineering
Michael B. McGraw-Hill Series in
2 Introduction to Mechatronics Mechanical Engineering 2003
Histand, David G. Al-
and Measurement Systems
ciatore
Shetty, Devdas, and
3 Mechatronics system design. 2010.
CL-Engineering, Richard A. Kolk.
4 Mechatronics: an introduction., Bishop, Robert H. CRC Press 2017.
Intelligent Mechatronic Sys- R. Merzouki, A. K. Sa-
5 tems: Modeling, Control and mantaray, P. M. Pathak, Springer, London 2003
Diagnosis B. Ould Bouamama
 Video Links (NPTEL, SWAYAM…)
Module
Link ID
No.
1 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107298/
2 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107298/
3 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107298/
4 https://archive.nptel.ac.in/courses/112/107/112107298/